3.1 Aero Hand Book 17-18

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 275

Dept.

of AERO Student Hand Book

III-B.Tech–I SEM
STUDENT HANDBOOK
A.Y.2017-18

Dept. of AERO

MLR Institute of Technology


Dundigal (V), Quthbullapur (M), R.R Dist,
Hyderabad – 500043, A.P
www.mlrinstitutions.ac.in

MLR Institute of Technology Page 1


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

VISION
STATEENT

VISION STATEMENT OF MLRIT

To create and nurture competent Engineers and managers who would be enterprise leaders in all parts
of the world with aims of reaching the skies and touching the stars and yet feet firmly planted on the
ground – good human beings steeped in ethical and moral values.

MISSION
STATEMENT
MISSION STATEMENT OF MLRIT

MLR Institute of Technology is committed to providing a positive, professional and conducive


learning environment where all students are inspired to achieve their potential and strive for
excellence in a global society as dignified professionals with the cooperation of all stakeholders.

GOALS
OF MLRIT
GOALS OF MLRIT

Goals of Engineering education at undergraduate / graduate level:

 Equip students with industry – accepted career and life skills


 To create a knowledge warehouse for students
 To disseminate information on skills and competencies that are in use and in demand by the industry
 To create learning environment where the campus culture acts as a catalyst to student fraternity to
understand their core competencies, enhance their competencies and improve their career prospects.
 To provide base for lifelong learning and professional development in support of evolving career
objectives, which include being informed, effective, and responsible participants within the
engineering profession and in society.
 To prepare students for graduate study in Engineering and Technology.
 To prepare graduates to engineering practice by learining from professional engineering assignments.

VISION AND MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT OF


MLR Institute of Technology Page 2
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
VISION:

“To be a centre of excellence in Aeronautical engineering with emphasis on research, Development and
innovation and serve the needs of industry in our country and the globe as a whole”.

MISSION:

The mission statements are the action statements, the department intends to implement in fulfilling its
vision. The key components are quality technical education, multidisciplinary skills and Research and
Development activities.

a. Provide quality education well-grounded in the fundamental principles of Aeronautical


Engineering.
b. Consistently produce top quality Aeronautical engineers with core and multidisciplinary skills, who
can take leadership positions and become successful entrepreneurs.
c. Continuously strive for creation of new knowledge; undertake Research and Development that will
contribute to the industrial development of the nation.

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES OF THE DEPARTMENT OF

AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
PEO I

Preparation: To prepare the students to excel in undergraduate, post graduate in Aeronautical


engineering and mould their careers for successful employment in industry, academic and
entrepreneurial activities.

PEO II

Core Competence: Graduates of Aeronautical engineering programme will analyze and


synthesize data and apply technical concepts which lead to the design of new products, improve
upon existing products and systems and develop technical problem solving skills.

PEO III

Breadth: Graduates will excel in a wide range of Aeronautical engineering fields such as Design,
Analysis and multi-disciplinary areas.

PEO-IV:

Professionalism: Graduates will have excellent oral and written communication skills, team work
skills, ethical attitude and an ability to relate engineering issues to broader social environment.

PEO-V:
Learning Environment: To provide a passionate academic environment for students that
encourage learning of emerging technologies, acquire leadership qualities and guidelines needed
for a successful career and engage in lifelong learning.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 3


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Our Pioneers…
MARRI LAXMAN REDDY – CHAIRMAN
Sri Marri Laxman Reddy, the Founder Chairman of MLR Institutions – MLR
Institute of Technology, MLR Institute of Pharmacy and Marri Laxman Reddy
Institute of Technology and Management. He is also Founder Chairman of St.
Martin’s Engineering College and St. Martins Schools at Balanagar, Chintal
(HMT) and Malkajgiri who has been in the field of education from last 22 years with the aim spreading
quality education among children at the school and college level. He is a veteran Athlete International
repute.

MARRI RAJASEKHAR REDDY – SECRETARY


Mr. M. Rajasekhar Reddy, a person with remarkable abilities and great acumen
and a dynamic leader. He is known to be the dynamic mentor of MLR Institute
of Technology who is always on the sprit to take the institute to newer levels in
every aspect of an “Ideal Institution” and strives hard to make every dream a
reality. He like his father Mr. M. Laxman Reddy, has a credit of establishing
Institute of Aeronautical Engineering adding a new flavor to St. Martins group
of Institutions, Vidyanjali Grammer School. His ability to turn adversities into
opportunities is unquestionable.
The Secretary has a vision of establishing MLR Institute of Technology as a brand. He is striving hard to
initiate various industry oriented programs for the benefit of the students and he envisions his student to
be present at the top most position in the industry.

Dr. P. BHASKARA REDDY – DIRECTOR


Dr.P.Bhaskara Reddy, the Principal, MLR Institute of Technology is a young and dynamic Professor of
ECE, has 25 years of Industry, Teaching, Research and Administrative
experience in reputed engineering colleges & industry. In 25 years of
experience served various positions from Asst. Professor to Principal.
Research & Guidance: Published 9 Laboratory Manuals, 55 Research
papers at National and International Level on Education, Electronics
Communication, I.T, Computer Networks, E-Commerce etc. Guided 5
Research Scholars for their Doctorates, about 40 M.Tech., M.C.A. and
B.Tech projects.
Symposiums Conducted: 5 National Level Technical Symposiums on various topics in Electronics &
Communications, Computers etc.
Awards Received: 1). Bharath Jyothi Award in 2003 from IIFS, New Delhi, 2). Rastraprathiba Award in
2004 from ICSEP, New Delhi, 3). Knowledge Award from Alumni of SVHCE for the year 2001.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 4


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

MLR Institute Technology


(Affiliated to JNTU & Approved by AICTE)
Dundigal, Quthbullapur Mandal, R.R. Dist.- 500 043.
Ph: 08418 – 204066, 204088
www.mlrinstitutions.ac.in

AERO STUDENT HANDBOOK


III B Tech –I Semester
Academic Year: 2017-2018

Document No: MLRIT/AERO/SHB/2017 Date of Issue: Jun’2017

MLR Institute of Technology Page 5


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page
S.No. Content
No.
1.General Information
About the college
1.1.Beautiful campus
1 1.2.Faculty 1
1.3.Infrastructure
1.4.Laboratories
1.5.TOEFL Centre
1.6.English Language Laboratory
1.7.R&D Cell
1.8.Library
2 2
1.9.National Programme on Technology
Enhanced Learning (NPTEL)
1.10.Co-Curricular Activities
1.11.Professional bodies
1.12.Extra curricular activities
3 3
1.13.Students Counselling &Career ServicesDept
(SCCS-Dept)

1.14.Finishing School
4 4
1.15.In House projects
1.16.MOUs
5 5
1.17.Student achievements
6 6
1.18.Contact information

7 2. Placement and Higher Studies 7


2.1.Industry Grade skills required for Employment
2.2.Important criteria for employment
8 2.3.Higher Studies 8

9 2.4.Various Scholarships available in India 9

10 2.5.Various International Scholarships available in India 10


11 3. Student Career Oriented Professional Certification Courses 11

4. Performance Monitoring and Guidance


12 4.1. Student Feedback 12
4.2.Class Teacher
4.3.Class Representatives and their roles
MLR Institute of Technology Page 6
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

4.4. Performance Counseling


4.5. Remedial Classes / Tutorial / Revisions
4.6. Backlog Management
4.7. Correspondence with Parents
13 13
5. Rules & Regulations for students
5.1. Administrative
5.2. Academic

14 5.3. Dress Code 14


5.4. Discipline & Punctuality
5.5. Lab Classes
5.6. Fee
15 16
5.7. Transport
5.8. Library Rules
16 5.9. General 17
17 5.10. Ragging 18

6. Academic Regulations 2009 for B.Tech. Regular


18 6.1. Award of B.Tech. Degree 20
6.2. Maximum Duration for Course Completion
6.3. Credits
6.4. Distribution and Weightage of marks
19 21
6.5. Attendance Requirements

20 6.6. Attendance Requirements 24

21. 6.7 Minimum Academic Requirements 24

22 7. Course Calendar for the Year 26

23 8.II YEAR I SEMESTER COURSE STRUCTURE 27

9. MATHEMATICS-III
9.1. Course Description
9.2. Prerequisite
9.3. Marks Distribution
24 9.4. Evaluation Scheme 28-49
9.5. Course Outcomes
9.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed
9.7. JNTUH Syllabus
9.8. Course Plan
9.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the
MLR Institute of Technology Page 7
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Program Outcomes
9.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes

Unit-I-V
9.11. Objective Questions
9.12. Tutorial Questions
9.13. Assignment Questions

10. PROBABILITY THEORY AND STOCHASTIC PROCESS

10.1. Course Description


10.2. Prerequisite
10.3. Marks Distribution
10.4. Evaluation Scheme
10.5. Course Outcomes
10.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed
10.7. JNTUH Syllabus
25 10.8. Course Plan 50-79
10.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes
10.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes

Unit-I-V
10.11. Objective Questions
10.12. Tutorial Questions
10.13. Assignment Questions

11.SWITCHING THEORY AND LOGIC DESIGN

11.1. Course Description


11.2. Prerequisite
11.3. Marks Distribution
11.4. Evaluation Scheme
11.5. Course Outcomes
11.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed
11.7. JNTUH Syllabus
11.8. Course Plan
11.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the
26 80-97
Program Outcomes
11.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes

MLR Institute of Technology Page 8


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Unit-I-V
11.11. Objective Questions
11.12. Tutorial Questions
11.13. Assignment Questions

12. ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS

12.1. Course Description


12.2. Prerequisite
12.3. Marks Distribution
12.4. Evaluation Scheme
12.5. Course Outcomes
12.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed
12.7. JNTUH Syllabus
27 12.8. Course Plan 98-128
12.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes
12.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes

Unit-I-V
12.11. Objective Questions
12.12. Tutorial Questions
12.13. Assignment Questions

13. ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS


13.1. Course Description
13.2. Prerequisite
13.3. Marks Distribution
13.4. Evaluation Scheme
13.5. Course Outcomes
13.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed
13.7. JNTUH Syllabus
28 13.8. Course Plan 129-161
13.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes
13.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes

Unit-I-V
13.11. Objective Questions
13.12. Tutorial Questions
13.13. Assignment Questions

29 14. SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 162-183


14.1. Course Description

MLR Institute of Technology Page 9


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

14.2. Prerequisite
14.3. Marks Distribution
14.4. Evaluation Scheme
14.5. Course Outcomes
14.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed
14.7. JNTUH Syllabus
14.8. Course Plan
14.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes
14.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes
Unit-I-V
14.11. Objective Questions
14.12. Tutorial Questions
14.13. Assignment Questions
15. Flight Mechanics-I
15.1. Course Description
15.2. Prerequisite
15.3. Marks Distribution
15.4. Evaluation Scheme
15.5. Course Outcomes
15.6. How Program Outcomes are Assessed
15.7. JNTUH Syllabus
30
15.8. Course Plan
15.9. Mapping Course Objectives Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes
15.10.Mapping Course Outcomes Leading to the Achievement of the
Program Outcomes
Unit-I-V
15.11. Objective Questions
15.12. Tutorial Questions
16. ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LAB
30 15.1.Syllabus 184-185
15.2.Lab Schedule
17. BASIC SIMULATION LAB
186-187
31 16.1.Syllabus
16.2.Lab Schedule

MLR Institute of Technology Page 10


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

MLR Institute of Technology


(Affiliated to JNTU & Approved by AICTE)
Dundigal, Quthbullapur Mandal, R.R. Dist.- 500 043.
Ph: 08418 – 204066, 204088, 9866755166

1.GENERAL INFORMATION
About the College
1.1 BEAUTIFUL CAMPUS:
Set in Sylvan surroundings away from the hustle & bustle of city life yet only 4 km away
from Mahindra Satyam Technology Park on Balanagar – Narsapur state highway, the
Institute is extremely conducive to academic, co-curricular and extra-curricular activities.
It has large and well ventilated buildings with modern equipment in place and “State of
the art”, sports facilities.

HIGHLIGHTS:

1.2 FACULTY:
The College is proud to have the best faculty, a blend of experienced and academics with eminent
academicians team IIT’s, NIT’s and other reputed organizations teaching at the Institute that
makes MLRIT as one of the best Institute pursue B.Tech, MCA and MBA as one of the under
JNTU Hyderabad. The faculty is constantly encouraged to upgrade their qualifications and a
number of them have enrolled for Ph.D. Most of the faculty members have been empowered with
Impact teachings under Wipro Mission 10X program.

1.3 INFRASTRUCTURES:
The Institute is housed in a RCC Building with a built up area of 2.50 Lakh Sq. Ft in 10 Acres
and established an Air Conditioned Auditorium with Seminar Halls and a Central Library. A
good canteen caters hygienic food and a fleet of buses running from all important points to bring
the students to the college. Accessibility of HDFC Bank ATM within the Campus is an recent
addition to enable students and faculty to withdraw cash anytime.

1.4 LABORATORIES:
The Institute has State of the art laboratories with 500 plus Pentium IV Branded Systems
equipped with latest hardware and software with online testing facility catering to the needs of
CSE, IT and MCA Programs. The Institute also has well equipped Electronic Labs, Aeronautical
Engineering Labs and Workshops for ECE and Aeronautical Engineering Students. The college
has recently established cadence lab for VLSI design and CATIA Aeronautical Design Lab.

1.5 TOEFL CENTRE:

MLR Institute of Technology Page 11


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

The Institute is an Authorized TOEFL iBT Centre, which will conduct tests all through
the year as per the iBT schedule.

1.6 ENGLISH LANGUAGE LABORATORY:


The Institute has established Ultramodern Computerized English language Laboratory
with 60 plus Computer Systems loaded with latest Software to enhance the Softskills of
Students to make the Students Industry ready.
1.7 R&D CELL:
The Institute has an R&D Cell under the Chairmanship of Prof. Dr. P. Bhaskara Reddy.
The R&D cell undertakes externally funded R&D projects from agencies like AICTE,
DST, UGC and other similar state, private and society / trust bodies. It also undertakes
research publications and interactions of faculty members with outside world.

1.8 LIBRARY:
The Institute Library has over 14598 books and 78 National and International journals
that are required to all branches of Engineering. The Institute has the unique distinction
of becoming Member of DELNET that connects more than 700 libraries in Asia Pacific
Region. The Library has 25 Computers with Internet Facility that makes our knowledge
Savvy Students to be technically competent on par with Industry professionals.

1.9 NATIONAL PROGRAMME ON TECHNOLOGY ENHANCED


LEARNING (NPTEL)
The main objective of NPTEL program is to enhance the quality of engineering education
in the country by developing curriculum based video and web courses. This is being
carried out by seven IITs and IISc Bangalore as a collaborative project. In the first phase
of the project, supplementary content for 129 web courses in engineering / science and
humanities have been developed. Each course contains materials that can be covered in
depth in 40 or more lecture hours. In addition, 110 courses have been developed in video
format, with each course comprising of approximately 40 or more one-hour lectures. In
the next phase other premier institutions are also likely to participate in content creation.

1.10 CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:


The Institution organizes Local Industrial Visits to Organizations like
DOORDARSHAN, BSNL, and to Student Conferences like HYSEA Student
Conference at INFOSYS, Gachibowli Campus, and Government Sponsored Summits
like INDO SOFT IT Summit 2008 at Hitex City Convention Centre to Interface with the
Industry for Career Planning and to make them Industry Ready. The Aeronautical
Students Visited IIT Madras for Aeromodelling Workshop and Air Force Academy
Dundigal for Knowledge Enhancement. The Institute focuses on Techno Management
Events like Nikashopala and Zavtra to enhance the Technical Skills and Soft Skills to
make them Employable.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 12


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

1.11 PROFESSIONAL BODIES:


MLR Institute of Technology has the unique distinction of becoming Institutional
Member in Professional bodies such as Confederation of Indian Industry (CII),
Aeronautical Society of India (AeSI), Computer Society of India (CSI), Institute of
Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (IETE), Indian Society of Technical
Education (ISTE), ELIAP and Hyderabad Management Association.

1.12 EXTRA-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:


The Institute helps the B.Tech, MCA and MBA Students to imbibe Culture, Knowledge
and Sportsman Spirit during their Study Period.
The Institution has a Basketball Court ,Volley ball Court, Beach Volley ball Court,
Cricket Stadium with 400 meter Excellent track for Athletic Meet and Indoor Stadium
for Shuttle Badminton and Gymnasium. MLRIT has been regularly conducting JNTU
Zonal Games Football, Cricket, and State level Volleyball Tournaments. The Institute
has been awarded as the best organiser for conducting JNTU Zone A Intercollegiate
Tournaments by JNTUH. MLRIT is affiliated to Hyderabad Cricket Association (HCA)
to play league Cricket Matches. The college has conducted 5K RUN in 2008-09 and
south zone Cricket Tournament in 2009-10.
The Institute also organises events like Traditional Day, Annual Day, Fashion Shows,
Rockshows and other Cultural Events. This year for the First time, it has conducted
Danz Pavimento a State Level Dance Competition and a Musical Nite by International
Repute Vishal & Shekhar during Annual Day Celebrations. MLR Institutions has been
conducting Traditional Day every year. The purpose of Celebrating traditional day is
basically to imbibe a spirit of Oneness, where the First year Students who have joined
the Institute shed their Inhibitions, play and dine together with their seniors and
recollect the old traditions & glory of the Past.
Apart from that the traditional day is being celebrated with a purpose of removing fear
and as a measure of Anti-Ragging activity.
The college has a National Service Scheme (NSS) unit, which conducts a number of
programmes viz blood donation camp, tree plantation, community services in the
adjoining villages, flood relief, etc. The college has sent a team of volunteers for flood
relief service on 14th Oct. 2009 to Mahaboob Nagar.

1.13 STUDENTS COUNSELING & CAREER SERVICES DEPT (SCCS-


DEPT):
MLR IT is only institution among 600+ professional colleges in AP, that takes into
consideration each student individual aspiration and ambition into audit, and extend
support on exclusive basis to each student for successful future into Employment /
Entrepreneur / Research & Development / Higher Education before graduating from our
campus.

1.14 FINISHING SCHOOL:

MLR Institute of Technology Page 13


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

MLR Institute of Technology is the only Institute which offers Special Training
programme partnering Institute for Electronic Governance, Govt of A.P and Infosys.
The students from the Institute are selected every year and given special Training
programme to make them Industry Grade and opportunity is given to them to place
themselves in Multi National Companies.

1.15 IN HOUSE PROJECTS:


The students are taking part in International Project competitions hosted by major
MNCs, like IBM, Microsoft and Infosys. The Great Mind Challenge hosted by IBM,
Microsoft Imagine Cup and project work as part of foundation programme conducted
under the aegis of Infosys are some of the important projects presently being undertaken
by the students of MLRIT. Further, the students are encouraged to do In House Projects
under the supervision of expect faculty members.

1.16 MOUs:
The Institute has MOUs for student and faculty enhancement programmes with Multi
National Companies like
 IBM
IBM has extablished “Center of Excellence” in MLRIT

 Sun Microsystem Systems


Student Development Programmes and Certificates

 Oracle
Faculty and Student Development Programmes
 WIPRO: Mission – 10X Programme
Faculty impact teaching programme

 CA Labs
Student and Faculty enablement Programme

 Infotech
To enhance the quality of educational experience for student community

 Mahindra Satyam
Industry Oriented course ware and Technology

 Institute of Electronic Governance


Faculty Enablement Programme on “Soft Skills, Technical Skills, Reasoning and
Aptitude and
Basic Computer Skills”.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 14


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

 Indo – US Collaboration for Engineering Education


Faculty Development Programme sponsored by Infosys

 Microsoft IT Academy
Student and Faculty enablement programme

 Infosys
Foundation Programme for students

 IIIT, Gachibowli, Hyderabad


Certification in Information Technology (CIT) for students

 SAM Technologies
In house projects in Robotics and Embedded System

1.17 STUDENT ACHIEVEMENTS:


 Ms. R. PALANIAMMAL of Aeronautical Engineering department has secured a
University
Rank and Gold Medal for the batch 2005-2009.

 A PRAVEEN KUMAR secured 105th rank in GATE.

 Rishit D Shah became the Microsoft Student Partner and Microsoft Student
Campus Ambassador. He is a Microsoft Certified Professional.

 N. Sai Praneeth also has been selected as a Microsoft student ambassador.

 M. Prashanth Reddy and M. Ramya of CSE Department have been selected as the
Student Ambassador for IBM.

 The CSE department students Nikhil Bharadwaj, Shashank and Sulibhavi Santhosh
developed a Google Application connecting all the institute activities. Lolitha and
Gananasudha of IT, Praneeth, Rajender, Akshay Raj, Harish and Pankaj of CSE,
Achuth and Gautam of Aero are maintaining the application.

 M Pavan Kumar of CSE Department has been selected as brand Ambassador of


Sun Academic Initiative.

 253 students and 5 faculty members have got IBM DB2 Certification as part of
TGMC’09.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 15


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

 The Institute has achieved 100% results in Aeronautical Engineering, 99% in CSE,
94% in ECE, 91% in MCA and 83% in MBA departments for outgoing batches.

 The Students of MLRIT have won Volleyball Tournament and were Runner’s in
Table Tennis Singles and Doubles JNTU Zone ‘A’ Inter Collegiate Tournament.

 P Shivaprasad of MBA has represented Senior National Basketball Tournament


held at Delhi.

 G. Manikanta Gupta, ECE 1st Year won “National memory championship” in


abstract images, organized by World Memory Council.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 16


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

1.18 CONTACT INFORMATION

Principal - Prof. Dr. P. Bhaskara Reddy - 9866678599

Dean (CS) - Prof. K. L. Chugh - 9866666601

Department Head CSE - Mr.Chadra shekar Reddy - 9959535832

Department Head ECE - Mr. Parankusham - 9160404638

Department Head IT - Dr.Srinivas Rao - 9848292046

Department Head AERO - Dr.M..Satyanarayana Gupta - 9160404640

Department Head MECH - Dr.S.Madhu - 9160404635

Department Head MBA - Ms.K.Suhrullekha - 9160404639

Department Head H&S - Dr. V. Radhika Devi - 9848472797

Administrative Officer - Mr.A.Chennaiah - 9866755166

MLR Institute of Technology Page 17


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2. PLACEMENT & HIGHER STUDIES


MLR Institute of Technology has a unique distinction of placing their First Batch of
B.Tech/MCA Students in their prefinal year of Study and MBA Students in Multi National
Companies. The Institute has so far interacted with more than 96 Companies and 142
Selections from B.Tech/MCA and MBA Programmes have taken Place.

In this direction Apart from the Placements the Institute has arranged Summer Internship
Programmes with Companies like M/s Infotech Enterprises Ltd, Mahindra Finance, Max
New York Life Insurance, Nokia Ltd , Mahindra Finance, Bajaj Capital Ltd, Reliance
Money and Tata AIG for Engineering and MBA Students to develop Mentor Relationships
and to get to know about the Work Culture and gain Competencies to make them Industry
Ready during their Study period.

The Institute has arranged Campus Recruitment drives with MNC’s Like Tata Advanced
Systems, IBM, Medha Servo drives, NR Radio & Switches Pvt. Ltd, OsiTechnologies Ltd,
Genpact, Reliance Money, Nagarjuna Cements Ltd & Oasis Software Informatics.
The Institute organized an Industrial Tour to 3rd & 4th Year Aeronautical Engineering
Students to Satish Dawan Space Center (SHAR) Sriharikota on 16-12-2009. The 4th year
students visited Airforce Academy, Dundigal, for an Industrial Visit on 22-12-2009.
The CSE & ECE students visited Infosys Infosys on 18-07-2009 for the SPARK Programme
which is an orientation programme on Information Technology Space.

2.1 INDUSTRY GRADE SKILLS REQUIRED FOR EMPLOYMENT


Behavioral and Communication Skills are recognized as important elements in
professional development of an Engineer including English for specific purposes.
Employers give considerable value to these diverse set of skills at the time of interviews.
In addition to course curriculum, every student will gain the following skills during the
study period:
 Analytical and Problem solving skills
 Subject – specific knowledge
 Research and improved decision making abilities
 Oral communication skills
 Managerial skills
 Understanding of other cultures
 Confidence and competence to work in International environment
As students are the future leaders, the Responsibility, Accountability and exhibiting the
leadership skills should start from the first year of engineering. Every student is advised to
read / practice from the following books;
 Verbal and Nonverbal by RS Agarwal
 Baron GRE
 Wren and Martin English Grammer Book

MLR Institute of Technology Page 18


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2.2 IMPORTANT CRITERIA OF EMPLOYMENT


In addition to the industry grade skills required for employment, the most important
criteria for employment is that the student should get a minimum of 60% in academics
with no backlogs to make them eligible for campus recruitments. In the recent past, many
companies stipulated a cut of 65% for attending the interview / writing the test. Every
student should Endeavour to achieve a minimum of 65% with no backlogs to make them
suitable for picking up by good companies.

Job Portals:
1. www.freshersworld.com
2. www.monster.com
3. www.naukri.com

2.3 HIGHER STUDIES


M.Tech
The Graduate Aptitude Test in Engineering (GATE) is an all-India examination
administered and conducted in eight zones across the country by the GATE Committee
comprising faculty from Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore and seven Indian Institutes of
Technology on behalf of the National Coordinating Board - GATE, Department of
Education, Ministry of Human Resources Development (MHRD), and Government of India.
Objective
To identify meritorious and motivated candidates for admission to Post Graduate
Programmes in
Engineering, Technology, Architecture and Pharmacy at the National level. To serve as
benchmark for normalization of the Undergraduate Engineering Education in the country.

This provides an opportunity for advanced engineering education in India. An M.E or


M.Tech degree is a desirable qualification for our young engineers seeking a rewarding
professional career. Engineering students, while in the final year of their degree course,
spend considerable time in seeking an opening for studies in foreign universities.
The students are advised to pursue M.Tech in IIT’s/NIT’s/University Colleges.
MBA
Earning a Master’s of Business Administration (MBA) degree can provide you with
management skills and business expertise that open new career opportunities to you. An
MBA program will also launch you into the much higher pay range that upper level
managers and executives enjoy. Furthermore, in the high-level positions, an MBA degree
will allow you to hold and your work will often be more interesting and rewarding.
The students are advised to pursue M.BA in IIM’s/XLRI/Reputed Business
Schools.

Higher Studies Abroad


MLR Institute of Technology Page 19
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

TOEFL is mandatory for seeking admission in any academic course at any level-
undergraduate, graduate or post graduate, in USA and Canada. Similarly UK Universities
ask for IELTS for seeking admission to graduate and past graduate courses.

GRE The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is administered by the Educational Testing
Services (ETS) for admission into all graduate academic programs (except management) in
universities across USA and Canada and some selected universities across the world
including India. The exam is a Computer Adaptive Test and is administered at any of the
Sylvan testing centers in the country after prior registration.

The GMAT is a Computer Adaptive Test administered online by Educational Testing


Services (ETS) through Sylvan testing centers located in all the major cities in India. Those
who wish to enroll for courses in Business Management in American universities have to
take the GMAT test and submit their scores to the department.

2.4 VARIOUS SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE IN INDIA

Bharat Petroleum Scholarship For Higher Studies | Balarama Digest Scholarship | Central
Institute of Indian Languages | Fair & Lovely Foundation - Project Saraswati Scholarships |
Government Of India Office of the Director General of Civil Aviation Scholarship | Homi
Bhabha Centre For Science Education Tata Institute of Fundamental Research Research
Scholarships | HSBC Scholarships | Indian Council Of Agricultural Research Award Of
National Talent Scholarship In Agriculture | Indian Institute Of Geomagnetism Research
Scholars | Invention Awards For School Children | Indian Oil Corporation Ltd (IOCL) -
Scholarships | Jawaharlal Nehru Memorial Fund Jawaharlal Nehru Scholarships For
Doctoral Studies | Junior Research Scholarships For Cancer Biology Tata Memorial Centre
& Tata Memorial Hospital | Jaigopal Garodia Vivekananda Trust Scholarships | Lalit Kala
Akademi - Scholarship | Mahindra All India Talent Scholarships For Diploma courses In
Polytechnics | National Brain Research Centre Scholarships | NTPC Scholarships | National
Institute Of Science Communication And Information Resources(NISCAIR) | National
Board For Higher Mathematics(NBHM) | National Thermal Power Corporation
Ltd.Scholarships | National Olympiad Programme | National Level Science Talent Search
Examination - 2005 | Narotam Sekhsaria Scholarship Programme | National Brain Research
Centre Scholarships, Post Doctoral Fellowships | National Aptitude Test | NIIT National IT
Aptitude Test | Oil And Natural Gas Corporation Ltd (ONGC) Scholarships To SC/ST
Students | Office Of The Director General of Civil Aviation Scholarships Stipend to the
SC/ST Candidates | Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan - Scholarships | Scholarships To Young
Artistes | Saf-Madanjeet Singh Scholarship | Sports Authority Of India - Sports Scholarships
| SAF-Madanjeet Singh Scholarship | Spic Macay Scholarships | The Childrens Foundation -
Scholarships | The L&T Build-India Scholarship | The Hindu-Hitachi Scholarships | The
Paul Foundation Scholarships | Technology Information Forecsting and Assessment
Council(TIFAC) Women Scientist Scholarship Scheme | The Young Talent IT Scholarship
The Dr.GB Scholarships Foundation |

MLR Institute of Technology Page 20


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2.5 VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE IN


INDIA

A * STAR India Youth Scholarship | A.M.M. Arunachalam-Lakshmi Achi Scholarship For


Overseas Study | British Chevening Scholarships | Bharat Petroleum - Scholarships for Higher
Studies | Cambridge Nehru Scholarships | Commonwealth Scholarship and Fellowship |
Czech Government Scholarship | Chevening Technology Enterprise Scholarship Programme |
Chinese Government Scholarship | Greek Government Scholarships | Israel Government
Scholarship | Iranian Government Scholarship | Offer of Italian Government Scholarship |
Japanese Government Scholarships | K.C.Mahindra Scholarships For Post-Graduate Studies
Abroad | Lady Meherbai D.Tata Scholarships | Mexican Government Scholarship | Norwegian
Government Scholarships | National Overseas Scholarships/Passage Grant for ST Candidates |
Portuguese Government Scholarships | Sophia Merit Scholarships Inc | Slovak Government
Scholarship | SIA Youth Scholarships | The Rhodes Scholarships India | The Ramakrishna
Mission Institute Of Culture Award of Debesh-Kamal Scholarships For Studies Abroad | The
Inlaks Foundation - Scholarships |

Website for Higher Studies:


1. www.higherstudyabroad.org
2. www.highereducationinindia.com

MLR Institute of Technology Page 21


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

3.STUDENT CAREER ORIENTED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION


COURSES

As per the career plan for students of MLR Institute of Technology with a view to bridge the gap between
Industry and Academia, it has been planned to equip every student with at least three International /
National certification by the time he / she completes the course of study. The details of the certification
courses are given below:

Branch Year Name of the Certification Course

2nd Year
Certificate Information Technology

IBM Certified DB2 Database Associate,


3rd Year
Computer Science and Infosys Campus Connect
Engineering / IT / MCA IBM Certified Rational Application
4th Year
Developer
4th Year
SUN Certified Java Programmer

Institute of Electronics and


2nd Year
Telecommunication Engineering
Electronics and Communication
Engineering Motorola @ CAMPUS
3rd Year
4th Year IBM Certified DB2 Database Associate
2nd Year
Certificate in AutoCAD

3rd Year
Aeronautical Engineering Certificate in Hypermesh

4th Year
Certificate in CATIA

2nd Year
Certificate in AutoCAD

3rd Year
Mechanical Engineering Certificate in HighPerMesh

4th Year
Certificate in CATIA

MLR Institute of Technology Page 22


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

4.PERFORMANCE MONITORING AND GUIDANCE

4.1 STUDENT FEEDBACK


In case the students find it difficult to cope up / understand a particular subject, they
are
advised to discuss it with

a. The Concerned Teacher


b. The Class Teacher
c. The Department Head
d. The Principal

Students can use the suggestion boxes for communicating feedback. Students should
mention their names so that they can be informed of the progress / more details /
clarifications can be obtained.

4.2 CLASS TEACHER


Every class is assigned a Class Teacher (a faculty member). Students can directly
discuss their college related or personal problems related to studies with them. The
Class Teachers are accessible to the students and they can talk to the Class Teacher
or whenever they are free from class / lab work. Class Teacher will meet with the
class representative on daily basis to discuss their day-to-day difficulties if any.

4.3 CLASS REPRESENTATIVES AND THEIR ROLES


Two students from each class are selected as the Class Representatives from the
department basing on their academic performance and discipline. Department Head
makes the selections.

Responsibilities of the Class Representatives:


 Collection of MIS format from Class Teacher daily.
 Communicating the departmental / college directives & information to the
students.
 Collecting the feedback of difficulties faced by the students and communicating
Suggestions for improvements.
 Coordinating academic events and co-curricular activities.
 Encourage students to interact for better studies, sharing books and notes.
 Compilation and submission of MIS form to class teacher at the end of the period.

4.4. PERFORMANCE COUNSELING


Mentors will evaluate the student individually for the following:
a. Less marks in internal exams
b. Continuous absence (3 days) and shortage of attendance

MLR Institute of Technology Page 23


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

c. Not understanding the subject


d. Students from Telugu medium
e. Assistance for back log subjects etc.
f. Communication with parents
g. Provide help to back log students

4.5 REMEDIAL CLASSES / TUTORIAL / REVISIONS


Remedial Classes are conducted for students who are weak and who do not perform
well in their internal examinations / class tests or for the students who want extra
help. Slots in the time table have been reserved for Tutorial where in the students are
helped to solve the question in the class itself.

4.6. BACKLOG MANAGEMENT


The Mentors maintain a complete record of Examination results of each student and
they counsel and guide them in preparing for backlogs. Students are provided with
material and important questions are discussed.

4.7. CORRESPONDENCE WITH PARENTS


Parents will be informed about the performance of their ward from time to time in the
semester. However parents are requested to be in touch with the Student mentor /
Department Head on a regular basis

5. RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR STUDENTS

5.1 ADMINISTRATIVE
1. Students, admitted into this College, are deemed to have agreed to the rules and
regulations of the college, as laid down by the College Authorities from time to time,
and the rules lay down in this leaflet, issued at the time of admission.
2. Students should inform any changes in the addresses/Phone No. of their parents /
guardians to the college office.
3. The college shall communicate to the parents \ guardians of the students from time to
time regarding the regularity and performance in the examinations of their wards. The
case of serious indiscipline on the part of the students (s) may also be communicated to
parent (s) \ guardian (s).

5.2. ACADEMIC
1. Students should attend the classes in - time. Late- comers shall not be permitted to
enter the class room and they are likely to loose the attendance.
2. Students are expected to be regular to the classes. The students Shall not absent
themselves for classes without prior approval. Prior permission shall be taken from
concerned counselor and submitted to the Head of the Department.
3. In case of ill-health, the student should submit the medical certificate along with

MLR Institute of Technology Page 24


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

prescription, etc., from a registered medical doctor. The student should get the
medical certificate within two days from the date of reporting to the college after iII
health and also produce a letter from Father/ Mother regarding ill-health. Permission
on medical grounds shall not be granted for one or two days.
4. The students should come to the laboratories with the prescribed uniform.
5. If a student disturbs the class or makes mischief, he / she will be marked absent and
may be expelled from the class.
6. Students shall spend their leisure time in the library/computer center.
7. Students are expected to put up the minimum aggregate percentage of attendance
(75%) as laid down by the JNT University. Students, falling short of 75% of
attendance shall not be promoted to the next Semester \ Class.
8. Parents \ guardians of the students can contact the college authorities either in person
or by post regarding discipline, regularity in attending classes, performance in the
examinations, etc., of their wards.

5.3 DRESS CODE


1.Students are expected to attend the college properly dressed. They should wear the
prescribed uniform while attending laboratory classes.
2. Students are expected to carry the identity cards, issued by the college, in the campus.
They are required to show the identity cards at the library, computer center, office, etc.
Students without Identity Cards are not allowed in to the laboratory classes.
5.4 DISCIPLINE & PUNCTUALITY
1. No student shall enter or leave the class room without the permission of
the teacher.
2. Calling students out of their class rooms while the lecture is in progress is prohibited.
3. Students are required to help in keeping the rooms, buildings, and premises
clean and tidy. Writing or sticking up of posters and notices on the walls is strictly
prohibited.
4. Smoking, Consumption of alcohol, intoxicating drinks or drugs is strictly
prohibited in and around the college premises. Those indulging in such activities will
be
put severely or expelled.
5. Students are expected to behave well with the staff, other students and the
general public. Any misbehavior, coming to the notice of the college authorities, will
be
severely dealt with.
6. The conduct of the students should be exemplary not only within the
premises of the college but also outside. This will help in maintaining the
image and status of the college.
7. Students are required to observe silence at all times in the college
campus.They shall not talk in loud tone or call each other by shouting.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 25


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

8. Students are prohibited from loitering in the verandahs / campus during


class hours, and sitting on the steps, stair-cases or parapet walls.
9. Students are not permitted to resort to strikes and demonstrations within the
campus.Participation in such activity entails their dismissal from the college. Any
problem
they face may be represented to the Counselor / Head of the Department / Principal.
10.Students are prohibited carrying Cell Phones and organizing any meeting
or entertainment in the college campus without the permission of the college
authorities.
11. The entry of outsiders without permission is prohibited. Any student found
responsible for bringing outsiders into the campus for settling personal disputes with
other students, shall be expelled from the college.
12. The college is entitled to take any disciplinary action, which is deemed necessary in the
case of any indiscipline on the part of the students. The same will be reflected on the
Conduct Certificate issued at the time of leaving the college.
13. No Student Unions, except Professional Associations, are permitted in the college.
14.If the students cause any damage to the college property knowingly or unknowingly
individually or in a group they have to pay 5 times to cost of property damaged them.
All the students are collectively responsible for the proper maintenance college property
i.e. building, furniture, lab equipment, garden, playgrounds, etc., recovery, calculated on
semester t semester basis, will be collected along with examination fee for the semester.
15. Students should keep their vehicles only at the parking place allotted for the
purpose.
Vehicle riding in the campus is strictly prohibited.
16. Sitting on the parapet wall and Riding beyond the parking limits, the fine will be
imposed
To Rs.100.00
17. Breakage or loss of equipment /property as decided by the appropriate authority
18. The Principal/Director may, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department, or
otherwise, inflict the following punishments in the interests of the student discipline
and the Institution: fined, curtailment attendance, denial of promotion to next semester,
suspension, expulsion or such other action as deemed necessary for the maintenance of
discipline in the campus.
5.5. LAB CLASSES
All students must attend lab classes without fail. Those absent shall follow this
procedure laid down in the prescribed format explaining valid reasons and obtain
permission to attend the future classes.
5.6 FEE
1. All students admitted into this college, will be required to pay the prescribed tuition fee
and other specified fees. Failure of the same will result in the cancellation of
admission. No portion of fees will be refunded under any circumstances. If any student
wishes to change the college or discontinue the course at any point for any reason, he \
she shall not be permitted to do so unless he \ she pays balance amount of four years
MLR Institute of Technology Page 26
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

fees which he \ she would have to pay, if he \she continued till the completion of the
course. His \ Her original certificates including I.e., etc., will be issued only after all the
dues as stated above, are cleared by the students. All senior students must pay the
college fee every year on or before the 15th of July irrespective of the reopening of the
college. If they fail the fine will be imposed as per norms of the management.
2. Miscellaneous fee paid for expenditure related to training programs i.e., technical or
soft skills etc., is not refundable.
3. Other than the above, if any fees are levied by the University the student has to be pay
the same.

5.7. TRANSPORT
All students who are availing the college bus facility must carry the bus-pass and must
produce when demanded, failing which they will not allowed to travel in the bus. All
students must travel in the allotted bus and routes. They should not change but occupy
only their allotted seats throughout. Unauthorized students caught in the bus for not
having the bus pass, should pay even if they traveled for one day also. First and second
year are not allowed to bring two-wheelers.

5.8. LIBRARY RULES


1. Library Books will be issued for 15 days time and renewal depends upon the
demand of the book.
2. Silence should be strictly maintained in the library.
3. Students are responsible for the library borrower card issued to them. Loss of the
library card should be reported in writing to the circulation section immediately.
Duplicate library borrower card will be issued on payment of Rs.150/- after a week
time from the date of application for duplicate cards.
4. The Library borrower card is not transferable.
5. Library books must be returned on or before the due date. Any student failed
to do so, 1st week –Rs.1/-per day/per book, 2nd week – Rs.2/-per day/per book
and 3rd week –Rs.3/-per day/per book penalty will be imposed From 4 th week-
Rs.5/-per day/per book penalty will be imposed.
6. Students shall not make any sort of conversation in any part of the library, causing
inconvenience to others.
7. Students shall not bring their belongings inside the library and should keep them
outside the library.
8. Students leaving from the library should be checked at the exit.
9. Tearing of pages/stealing of books will invite suspension from using of the library
facilities and further disciplinary action will be taken against such students, as per
college norms.
10. The borrower shall replace the New book within 7 days, otherwise, he/she has to
pay 3 times of the book cost, along with fine. In case of lose of book.

5.9. GENERAL

MLR Institute of Technology Page 27


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

1. All the students admitted in this college have to give an undertaking to abide by
the rules and regulations of this college in prescribed format given by the college.
2. All the students should attend the college after vacations (Dasara / Sankranthi /
Christmas / Semester term / summer) on the re-opening day without fail.
3. Students must deposit all the relevant original certificates and documents at the
time of the admission Office and they will not be returned until completion of the
course.
4. Admission of any student can be cancelled by the Management at any point during
the course for reasons which are not in consonance with the rules and regulations
and which are detrin the reputation of the college.
5. All the Students are here by informed that college authorities will not take any
responsibility for loss or theft of your valuable items and money kept in your
bags or some where else. Hence I request all the students are not to keep your
valuables in class room or anywhere without your presence.
6. Fee For Issue Of Duplicates
a) Duplicate Hall ticket Rs. 100.00
b) Duplicate Identity Card Rs. 100.00
c) Duplicate College Bus Pass Rs. 50.00
d) Duplicate Study Certificate for same purpose Rs. 50.00
e) Xerox copies of OD’s Rs. 50.00

All Breakage etc., penalties will be displayed on the Notice Board, and must be paid by
the student and no student will be allowed to write examination or internal test or
laboratory test, if penalties are not paid by the due date specified in the notice or circular.

5.10. RAGGING
Ragging in any form inside or outside the college campus is banned/Prohibited vide
Ragging Act 26 of AP. legislative Assembly 1997. Those who indulge in this
uncivilized activity are liable for severe disciplinary actions besides being liable for
prosecution.

SALIENT FEATURES
Ragging means doing an act which causes or is likely to cause insult 'or annoyance or fear or
apprehension or threat or intimidation or outrage of modesty or injury to a student.

S.No. Nature of Ragging Punishment

Teasing, Embarrassing Imprisonment Upto 6 Month or


1
andHumiliating Fine Upto Rs 1000/- or Both.

2 Assaulting or using Imprisonment Upto 1 Year or


criminal Force or criminal Fine Upto Rs 2000/- or Both.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 28


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

intimidation

Wrongfully restraining or Imprisonment Upto 2 Years or


3
Confining or causing hurt Fine Upto Rs 5000/- or Both.

Causing grievous hurt


kidnapping Or raping or Imprisonment Upto 5 Years or
4
committing unnatural Fine Upto Rs 10000/- or Both
offence

Causing death or abating Imprisonment Upto 10 Years or


5
Suicide fine Upto Rs. 50000/- or Both

Note:
1. A student convicted of any of the above offences, will be, dismissed from the college
2. A student imprisoned for more than six months for any of the above offences 'will not be
admitted in any other College.
3. A student against whom there is prima facie evidence of ragging in any form will be
suspended from the college immediately.

Prohibition of Ragging:
1. Ragging is prohibited as per act 26 of AP. Legislative assembly, 1997.
2. Ragging entails heavy fines and/or imprisonment.
3. Ragging invokes suspension and dismissal from the college.

4. Outsiders are prohibited from entering the college premises without permission.

5. All students must carry their identity cards and show them when Demanded.
6. The principal and staff will visit and inspect the rooms at any time.
7. Suspended students are debarred from entering the campus except when required to
attend enquiry and to submit an explanation

MLR Institute of Technology Page 29


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

B. Tech. - Regular Four Year Degree Program


(For batches admitted from the academic year 2015 - 16)
&
B. Tech. - Lateral Entry Scheme
(For batches admitted from the academic year 2016 - 17)

For pursuing four year under graduate Bachelor Degree Programme of study in
Engineering (B.Tech) offered by MLR Institute of Technology under Autonomous status is
herein referred to as MLRIT (Autonomous):

All the rules specified herein approved by the Academic Council will be in force and applicable
to students admitted from the Academic Year 2015-16 onwards. Any reference to “Institute” or
“College” in these rules and regulations shall stand for M L R Institute of Technology
(Autonomous).

All the rules and regulations, specified hereafter shall be read as a whole for the purpose of
interpretation as and when a doubt arises, the interpretation of the Chairman, Academic Council
is final. As per the requirements of statutory bodies, the Principal, M L R Institute of Technology
shall be the chairman Academic Council.

6.ADMISSION
Admission into first year of four year B. Tech. degree Program of study in Engineering:
6.1Eligibility:
A candidate seeking admission into the first year of four year B. Tech. degree Program
should have:
(i) Passed either Intermediate Public Examination (I.P.E) conducted by the Board of
Intermediate Education, Telangana, with Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry as optional
subjects or any equivalent examination recognized by Board of Intermediate Education,
Telangana or a Diploma in Engineering in the relevant branch conducted by the Board of
Technical Education, Telangana or equivalent Diploma recognized by Board of
Technical Education for admission as per guidelines defined by the Regulatory bodies of
Telangana State Council for Higher Education (TSCHE) and AICTE.
(ii) Secured a rank in the EAMCET examination conducted by TSCHE for allotment of a
seat by the Convener, EAMCET, for admission.

6.2 Admission Procedure:


Admissions are made into the first year of four year B. Tech. Degree Program as per the
stipulations of the TSCHE.
(a) Category A seats are filled by the Convener, EAMCET.
(b) Category B seats are filled by the Management.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 30


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

6.3Admission into the second year of four year B. Tech. degree Program in Engineering
Eligibility:
A candidate seeking admission under lateral entry into the II year I Semester B. Tech.
degree Program should have passed the qualifying exam (B.Sc. Mathematics or Diploma
in concerned course) and based on the rank secured by the candidate at Engineering
Common Entrance Test ECET (FDH) in accordance with the instructions received from
the Convener, ECET and Government of Telangana.

6.4 Admission Procedure:


Admissions are made into the II year of four year B. Tech. degree Program through
Convener, ECET (FDH) against the sanctioned strength in each Program of study as
lateral entry students.

PROGRAMS OFFERED
MLR Institute of Technology, an autonomous college affiliated to JNTUH, offers the
following B. Tech. Programs of study leading to the award of B. Tech. degree under the
autonomous scheme.
1) B.Tech.- Aeronautical Engineering
2) B.Tech. - Computer Science and Engineering
3) B.Tech. - Electronics and Communication Engineering
4) B.Tech. - Information Technology
5) B. Tech. - Mechanical Engineering

DURATION OF THE PROGRAMS


6.5 Normal Duration
B. Tech. degree program extends over a period of four academic years leading to the Degree
of Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) of the Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University
Hyderabad.
For students admitted under lateral entry scheme, B. Tech. degree program extends over a
period of three academic years leading to the Degree of Bachelor of Technology (B.
Tech.) of the Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University Hyderabad.

6.6 Maximum Duration


The maximum period within which a student must complete a full-time academic program is
8 years for B. Tech. If a student fails to complete the academic program within the
maximum duration as specified above, he shall forfeit the seat in B.Tech and his
admission shall stand cancelled.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 31


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

For students admitted under lateral entry scheme in B. Tech. degree program, the maximum
period within which a student must complete a full-time academic program is 6 years. If a
student fails to complete the academic program within the maximum duration as
specified above, he shall forfeit the seat in B.Tech and his admission shall stand
cancelled.
The period is reckoned from the academic year in which the student is admitted first time into
the degree Program.

AWARD OF B.Tech. DEGREE


A student will be declared eligible for the award of the B. Tech. degree if he/she fulfils
the following academic regulations:
The candidate shall pursue a course of study for not less than four academic years and not
more than eight years.
The candidate shall register for 176 credits and secure 176 credits.

PROGRAMME STRUCTURE
UGC/AICTE specified Definitions/ Descriptions are adopted appropriately for
various terms and abbreviations used in these Academic Regulations/ Norms, which
are listed below.

Semester Scheme:
Each UGP is of 4 Academic Years (8 Semesters), each year divided into two semesters of
23 weeks (90 working days), each Semester having - ‘Continuous Internal Evaluation
(CIE)’ and ‘Semester End Examination (SEE)’. Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) and
Credit Based Semester System (CBSS) as denoted by UGC,and Curriculum/Course
Structure as suggested by AICTE are followed.
The B.Tech. Programmes of MLR Institute of Technology are of semester pattern, with 8
Semesters constituting 4 Academic Years, each Academic Year having TWO Semesters
(First/Odd and Second/Even Semesters). Each Semester shall be of 23 Weeks duration
(inclusive of Examinations), with a minimum of 90 Instructional Days per Semester.
Credit Courses:
a) All Subjects/ Courses are to be registered by a student in a Semester to earn
Credits.Credits shall be assigned to each Subject/ Course in a L: T: P: C (Lecture
Periods: Tutorial Periods: Practical Periods : Credits) Structure, based on the following
general pattern ..
 One Credit - for One hour/Week/Semester for Theory/Lecture (L) Courses; and
 One Credit - for Two hours/Week/Semester for Laboratory/Practical (P) Courses,
Mini Project...

MLR Institute of Technology Page 32


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Identifying Mandatory Courses like Technical seminars/Micro


Project/EPICS/Certification Courses, Computational Mathematics (FOSS), Study Tour,
Guest Lecture, Tutorials, etc., will not carryany Credits
b) Contact Hours:Every student has to register for a set of course (subject) in each
semester, with the total number of credits being limited by considering the permissible
weekly contact hours - typically equal to 33 hours per week or equal to 40 periods per
week (i.e. 1 hour = 60 Minutes & 1 period = 50 Minutes); for this an average course load
of 22 credits per semester including Mandatory Non-Credit courses also in some
semester.

6.7 Subject/ Course Classification:


All Subjects/ Courses offered for the UGP are broadly classified as: (a) Foundation
Courses (FnC), (b) Core Courses (CoC), and (c) Elective Courses (EℓC).
- Foundation Courses (FnC) are further categorized as: (i) H&S (Humanities and Social
Sciences), (ii) BS (Basic Sciences), and (iii) ES (Engineering Sciences);
- Core Courses (CoC) and Elective Courses (EℓC) are categorized as PS (Professional
Subjects), whichare further subdividedas – (i) PC (Professional/ Departmental Core)
Subjects, (ii) PE (Professional/ Departmental Electives), (iii) OE (Open Electives);
and (iv) Project Works (PW);
- Minor Courses (1 or 2 Credit Courses, belonging to HS/BS/ES/PC as per relevance);
and
Mandatory Courses (MC - non-credit oriented).

Course Nomenclature:
The Curriculum Nomenclature or Course-Structure Grouping for the each of the UGP
E&T (B.Tech. Degree Programmes), is as listed below (along with AICTE specified %
Range of Total Credits).

Broad
S. Range
Course Course Group/
No Course Description of
Classificatio Category
. Credits
n
BS – Basic Includes - Mathematics, Physics 15%-
1)
Foundation Sciences and Chemistry Subjects 20%
Courses ES - Includes fundamental 15%-
2)
(FnC) Engineering engineering subjects. 20%

MLR Institute of Technology Page 33


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Sciences

HS – Includes subjects related to


3) Humanities and Humanities, Social Sciences 5%-10%
Social Sciences and Management.
Core PC – Includes core subjects related to
30%-
4) Courses Professional the Parent Discipline/
40%
(CoC) Core Department/ Branch of Engg.
PE – Includes Elective subjects
10%-
5) Professional related to the Parent Discipline/
15%
Electives Department/ Branch of Engg.
Elective
Elective subjects which include
Courses
inter-disciplinary subjects or
(EℓC) OE – Open
6) subjects in an area outside the 5%-10%
Electives
Parent Discipline/ Department /
Branchof Engg.
B.Tech. Project or UG Project
7) Project Work
or UG Major Project.
Industrial
Industrial Training/ Internship/
8) Training/ Mini-
Core UG Mini-Project/ Mini-Project. 10%-
Project
Courses 15%
Seminar/Colloquium based on
core contents related to Parent
9) Seminar
Discipline/ Department/ Branch
of Engg.
1 or 2 Credit Courses (subset of
10) Minor Courses Included
HS)
Mandatory
11) Mandatory Courses (non-credit) -
Courses (MC)
176(100
Total Credits for UGP (B. Tech.)Programme
%)

6.8 COURSE REGISTRATION


I. A ‘Faculty Advisor or Counsellor’ shall be assigned to each student, who advises him/her
about the UGP, its Course Structure and Curriculum, Choice/Option for
Subjects/Courses, based on his/her competence, progress, pre-requisites and interest.
II. Academic Section of the College invites ‘Registration Forms’ from students prior (before
the beginning of the Semester), ensuring ‘DATE and TIME Stamping’. The Registration
Requests for any ‘CURRENT SEMESTER’ shall be completed BEFORE the

MLR Institute of Technology Page 34


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

commencement of SEEs (Semester End Examinations) of the ‘PRECEDING


SEMESTER’

III. A Student can apply for Registration, which includes approval from his faculty advisor,
and then should be submitted to the College Academic Section through the Head of
Department (a copy of the same being retained with Head of Department, Faculty
Advisor and the Student).

IV. A Student may be permitted to Register for his/her Subjects/Course of CHOICE with a
typical total of 22 Credits per Semester (Minimum being 19C and Maximum being 25C,
permitted deviation being± 17%), based on his PROGRESS and SGPA/CGPA, and
completion of the ‘PRE-REQUISITES’ as indicated for various Subjects/Courses, in the
Department Course Structure and Syllabus contents.
V. 6.5 Choice for ‘additional Subjects/Courses’ to reach the Maximum Permissible Limit of
25 Credits (above the typical 22 Credit norm) must be clearly indicated, which needs the
specific approval and signature of the Faculty Advisor/Counsellor.
VI. 6.6 If the Student submits ambiguous choices or multiple options or erroneous(incorrect)
entries during Registration for the Subject(s)/Course(s) under a given/specified Course
Group/ Category as listed in the Course Structure, only the first mentioned
Subject/Course in that Category will be taken into consideration.
VII. 6.7 Dropping of Subjects/Courses or changing of options may be permitted, ONLY
AFTER obtaining prior approval from the Faculty Advisor (subject to retaining a
minimum of 19 C), ‘within 15 Days of Time’ from the commencement of that
Semester.Subject/Course Options exercised through Registration are final and CAN
NOT be changed, and CAN NOT be inter-changed; further, alternate choices will also
not be considered. However, if the Subject/ Course that has already been listed for
Registration (by the Head of Department) in a Semester could not be offered due to any
unforeseen or unexpected reasons, then the Student shall be allowed to have alternate
choice - either for a new Subject (subject to offering of such a Subject), or for another
existing Subject (subject to availability of seats), which may be considered. Such
alternate arrangements will be made by the Head of Department, with due notification
and time-framed schedule, within the FIRST WEEK from the commencement of Class-
work for that Semester.

6.9 SUBJECTS/ COURSES TO BE OFFERED


I. A Subject/Course may be offered to the Students, IFONLY a Minimum of 1/3 of
Students register to the course.
II. More than ONE TEACHER may offer the SAME SUBJECT (Lab/Practical’s may be
included with the corresponding Theory Subject in the same Semester) in any Semester.
However, selection choice for students will be based on - ‘CGPA Basis Criterion’ (i.e.,
MLR Institute of Technology Page 35
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

the first focus shall be on early Registration in that Semester, and the second focus, if
needed, will be on CGPA of the student).
III. If more entries for Registration of a Subject come into picture, then the concerned Head
of the Department shall take necessary decision, whether to offer such a Subject/Course
for TWO(or multiple) SECTIONS or NOT .
IV. OPEN ELECTIVES will be offered by a department to the students of other departments.

ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS
a. A student shall be eligible to appear for the End Semester Examinations, if he acquires
a minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the Subjects/Courses (excluding
Mandatory or Non-Credit Courses) for that Semester.
b. Condoning of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above, and
below 75%) in each Semester may be granted by the College Academic Committee on
genuine and valid grounds, based on the student’s representation with supporting
evidence by following the govt. rules in vogue.
c. A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condoning of shortage of attendance.
d. Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall in NO case be condoned.
e. A student will not be promoted to the next semester unless he/she satisfies the
attendance requirements of the current semester. The student may seek readmission for
the semester when offered next. He/She will not be allowed to register for the subjects
of the semester while he/she is in detention. A student detained due to shortage of
attendance, will have to repeat that semester when offered next.

6.10 .ACADEMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PROMOTION / COMPLETION OF


REGULAR B.TECH PROGRAM COURSE STUDY
a. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the Academic Requirements and
earned the Credits allotted to each Subject/Course, if he secures not less than 35%
marks in the End Semester Examination, and a minimum of 40% of marks in the sum
total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End
Examination)taken together; in terms of Letter Grades, this implies securing P Grade or
above in that Subject/Course.
b. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the Academic Requirements and
earned the Credits allotted to - Industry oriented Mini-Project/Seminar, if he/she
secures not less than 40% of the total marks (50 marks) to be awarded for each. The
student would be treated as failed, if he/she - (i) does not submit a report on his
Industry oriented Mini-Project, or does not make a presentation of the same before the
Evaluation Committee as per the schedule, or (ii) does not present the Seminar as
required in the IV year I/II Semester, or (iii) secures less than 40% of marks in Industry
oriented Mini-Project/Seminar evaluations. He may reappear once for each of the above

MLR Institute of Technology Page 36


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

evaluations, when they are scheduled again; if he fails in such ‘one reappearance’
evaluation also, he has to reappear for the same in the next subsequent Semester, as per
the schedule.
c. A Student will not be promoted from I Year to II Year, unless he/she fulfils the
Attendance requirements.
d. A Student will not be promoted from II Year to III Year, unless he/she fulfils the
Attendance and Academic Requirements and (i)secures a total of 44 Credits out of 88
Credits upto II Year II Semester from all the relevant regular and supplementary
examinations, whether he takes those examinations or not.
e. A Student will not be promoted from III Year to IV Year, unless he/she fulfils the
Attendance and Academic Requirements and (i) secures a total of 66 Credits out of
132 Credits upto III Year II Semester, from all the relevant regular and supplementary
examinations, whether he takes those examinations or not.
f. After securing the necessary 176 Credits as specified for the successful completion
of the entire UGP, resulting in 176 Credits for UGP performance evaluation, i.e., the
performance of the Student in these 176 Credits shall alone be taken into account for
the calculation of ‘the final CGPA.
g. If a Student registers for some more ‘extra Subjects’ (in the parent Department or
other Departments/Branches of Engg.) other than those listed Subjects totalling to 176
Credits as specified in the Course Structure of his Department, the performances in
those ‘extra Subjects’ (although evaluated and graded using the same procedure as that
of the required 176 Credits) will not be taken into account while calculating the SGPA
and CGPA. For such ‘extra Subjects’ registered, % marks and Letter Grade alone will
be indicated in the Grade Card, as a performance measure, subject to completion of the
Attendance and Academic Requirements as stated in items 8 and 9.1-9.7.
h. Students who fail to earn minimum of 176 Credits as per the Course Structure,
and as indicated above, within 8 Academic Years from the Date of Commencement of
their I Year shall forfeit their seats in B.Tech Programme and their admissions shall
stand cancelled.
When a Student is detained due to shortage of attendance/lack of credits in any Semester,
he may be re-admitted into that Semester, as and when offered. However the regulations
at the time of admissions hold good.

EVALUATION - DISTRIBUTION AND WEIGHTAGE OF MARKS


a The performance of a student in each Semester shall be evaluated Subject-wise
(irrespective of Credits assigned) with a maximum of 100 marks for Theory. The B.Tech
Project Work (Major Project) will be evaluated for 200 Marks. These evaluations shall be
based on 25% CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and 75% SEE (Semester End
Examination), and a Letter Grade corresponding to the % marks obtained shall be given.
b For all Theory Subjects/Courses as mentioned above, the distribution shall be 25 marks
for CIE, and 75 marks for the SEE.
MLR Institute of Technology Page 37
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

c For Theory Subjects (inclusive of Minor Courses), during the Semester, there shall be 2
mid-term examinations for 25 marks each. Each mid-term examination consists of one
objective paper for 10 marks, one subjective paper for 10 marks and assignment for 5
marks for each subject.
Objective paper is set for a total of 10 marks with 20 bits. Subjective Paper contains five
questions. Questions 1 & 2 with internal choice from unit-I and each question consists of
a & b sub-questions. Question 3 & 4 with internal choice from unit-II and question 5
having a, b bits with internal choice from first half part of unit-III for I-MID
examinations. For II-MID 1 & 2 questions from unit-4, questions 3 & 4 from unit-5 and
question no 5 from remaining half part of unit-3.
d . The first mid-term examination shall be conducted for the first 50% of the syllabus, and
the second mid-term examination shall be conducted for the remaining 50% of the
syllabus.
e First Assignment should be submitted before the commencement of the first mid-term
examinations, and the Second Assignment should be submitted before the
commencement of the second mid-term examinations. The assignments shall be
specified/given by the concerned subject teacher.
If any candidate is absent for the MID term examination or those who want to improve their
internal marks in any subject can opt for Computer Based Test (CBT) as and when offered.
The CBT is a 45 minutes duration ONLINE exam consisting of 25 objective questions from
the entire syllabus of the subject. The CBT can be taken after the payment of prescribed fee.
f For Practical Subjects, there shall be a Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) during the
Semester for 25 internal marks, and 50 marks are assigned for Lab/Practical End
Semester Examination (SEE). Out of the 25 marks for internals, day-to-day work in the
laboratory shall be evaluated for 15 marks; and for the remaining 10 marks - two internal
practical tests(each of 10 marks) shall be conducted by the concerned laboratory teacher
and the average of the two tests is taken into account. The SEE for Practical’s shall be
conducted at the end of the Semester by Two Examiners appointed by the Chief
controller of examinations in consultation with the Head of the Department.
g For the Subjects having Design and/or Drawing, (such as Engineering Graphics,
Engineering Drawing, Machine Drawing, Production Drawing Practice, and Estimation),
the distribution shall be 25 marks for CIE (10 marks for day-to-day work and 15 marks
for internal tests) and 75 marks for SEE. There shall be two internal tests in a semester
and the better of the two shall be considered for the award of marks for internal tests.
h 10.6 Open Electives:Students can choose One Open Elective (OE-I) during V Semester,
one (OE-II) during VI Semester, and one (OE-III) in VII Semester, from the list of Open
Electives given. However, Students cannot opt for an Open Elective Subject offered by
their own (parent) Department, if it is already listed under any category of the Subjects
offered by parent Department in any Semester.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 38


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

i There shall be an industry-oriented Mini-Project, in collaboration with an industry of


their specialization, to be taken up during the vacation after III year II Semester (VII
Semester) examination. However, the mini-project and its report shall be evaluated in VII
Semester. The industry oriented mini-project shall be submitted in a report form and
presented before the committee. It shall be evaluated for 50 marks. The committee
consists of an external examiner, head of the department,the supervisor of the mini-
project and a senior faculty member of the department. There shall be no internal marks
for industry-oriented mini-project.
j There shall be a Seminar Presentation in VIII Semester. For the Seminar, the student shall
collect the information on a specialized topic, prepare a Technical Report and submit to
the Department at the time of Seminar Presentation. The Seminar Presentation (along
with the Technical Report) shall be evaluated for 50 marks for internal examinations.
There shall be no SEE for seminar.
k There shall be a Comprehensive Viva& Test in VI & VIII Semester and will be
conducted SEE by a committee consisting of One External Examiner, Head of the
Department and two Senior faculty members of the Department. The comprehensive viva
is intended to assess the student’s understanding of the subjects he/she studied during the
B.Tech.course of study. The Comprehensive Viva-Voce& Test is evaluated for 50 marks
by the committee. There shall be no CIE for Comprehensive Viva.
Each Student shall start the Project Work during the VII Semester, as per the instructions
of the Project Guide/Project Supervisor assigned by the Head of Department. Out of total
200 marks allotted for the Project Work 50 marks shall be for CIE (Continuous Internal
Evaluation and 150 marks for the SEE (End Semester Viva-voce Examination).
In VIII semester a mid-course review is conducted by Head of the Department and the
project supervisor 25 marks based on the student’s progress. On completion of the project
the second evaluation is conducted for award of internal marks for another 25 marks
before the report is submitted making the total internal marks 50. The end semester
examination shall be based on the report submitted and a viva-voce exam for 150 marks
by committee comprising of the Head of the Department, project supervisor and an
external examiner. A minimum of 40% of maximum marks shall be obtained to earn the
corresponding credits.
End semester examination:
a) Question paper contains 2 Parts (Part-A and Part-B) having the questions distributed
equally among all units.
b) The distribution of marks for PART-A and PART-B will be 25 marks & 50 marks
respectively for UG programs Pattern of the question paper is as follows:

PART–A

MLR Institute of Technology Page 39


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Consists of two questions which are compulsory. The first question consists of five sub-
questions one from each unit and carry 3 marks each. Second question consists of five
sub-questions one from each unit and carry 2 marks each.

PART-B

Consists of 5 questions carrying 10 marks each. Each of these questions is from one unit
and may contain sub questions. Each question there will be an “either” “or” choice (that
means there will be two questions from each unit and the student should answer any one
question).

I For Mandatory Non-Credit Courses offered like Technical Seminar, Micro Project,
EPICS, Certification, Computational Mathematics in a Semester, after securing  65%
attendance and has secured not less than 35% marks in the SEE, and a minimum of 40%
of marks in the sum total of the CIE and SEE taken together in such a course, then the
student is PASS and will be qualified for the award of the degree. No marks or Letter
Grade shall be allotted for these courses/activities.However, for non credit courses
‘Satisfactory’ or “Unsatisfactory’ shall be indicated instead of the letter grade and this
will not be counted for the computation of SGPA/CGPA.

AWARD OF DEGREE
After a student has satisfied the requirement prescribed for the completion of the Program
and is eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree he shall be placed in one of the following
four classes Shown in Table.

Table: Declaration of Class based on CGPA (Cumulative Grade Point Average)

Class Awarded Grade to be Secured


First Class with
≥ 7.75 CGPA From the aggregate marks
Distinction
secured from 176 Credits
First Class ≥ 6.75 to < 7.75 CGPA for Regular Students and
Second Class ≥ 5.75 to < 6.75 CGPA 132 Credits for Lateral
Entry Students.
Pass Class ≥ 5.00 to < 5.75 CGPA
FAIL CGPA < 5
a) First Class with Distinction will be awarded to those students who clear all the
subjects in single attempt during his/her regular course of study.
b) Improvement of Grades and Completion of the Course

MLR Institute of Technology Page 40


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

i) Candidates who have passed in a theory paper in a semester are allowed to appear
for improvement only once in the next immediate instant exam for only one
subject of his choice.
ii)If candidate improves his/her grade, then his/her improved grade will be taken
into consideration for the award of GPA only.
iii) The improved grade shall not be higher than A+. Such improved grade will
not be counted for the award of prizes/medals, Rank and Distinction.
iv) If the candidate does not show improvement in the grade, his/her previous grade
will be taken into consideration.
v) Candidates will not be allowed to improve grade in the Comprehensive viva,
Laboratory, Seminars and Project Work. There is no improvement
examinations in VIII semester.

LETTER GRADE AND GRADE POINT


Marks will be awarded to indicate the performance of each student in each Theory
Subject, or Lab/Practical’s, or Seminar, or Project, or Mini-Project, Minor Course etc.,
based on the %marks obtained in CIE+SEE (Continuous Internal Evaluation + Semester
End Examination, both taken together), and a corresponding Letter Grade shall be given.
As a measure of the student’s performance, a 10-point Absolute Grading System using
the following Letter Grades (UGC Guidelines) and corresponding percentage of marks
shall be followed...
% of Marks Secured Letter Grade Grade Points
(Class Intervals) (UGC
Guidelines)
80% and above O
10
(  80% , ≤ 100% ) (Outstanding)
Below 80% but not less than 70% A+
9
(  70% , < 80% ) (Excellent)
Below 70% but not less than 60% A
8
(  60% , < 70% ) (Very Good)
Below 60% but not less than 55% B+
7
(  55% , < 60% ) (Good)
Below 55% but not less than 50% B
6
(  50% , < 55% ) (above Average)
Below 50% but not less than 45% C
5
(  45% , < 50% ) (Average)
Below 45% but not less than 40% P
4
(  40% , < 45% ) (Pass)

MLR Institute of Technology Page 41


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Below 40% F
0
( < 40% ) (FAIL)

A student obtaining F Grade in any Subject shall be considered ‘failed’ and will be
required to reappear as ‘Supplementary Candidate’ in the End Semester Examination
(SEE), as and when offered. In such cases, his Internal Marks (CIE Marks) in those
Subject(s) will remain same as those he obtained earlier.
Letter Grade does not imply any specific % of Marks.
In general, a student shall not be permitted to repeat any Subject/Course (s) only for the
sake of ‘Grade Improvement’ or ‘SGPA/CGPA Improvement’. However, he has to repeat
all the Subjects/Courses pertaining to that Semester, when he is detained.
A student earns Grade Point (GP) in each Subject/Course, on the basis of the Letter
Grade obtained by him in that Subject/Course (excluding Mandatory non-credit Courses).
Then the corresponding ‘Credit Points’ (CP) are computed by multiplying the Grade
Point with Credits for that particular Subject/Course.
Credit Points (CP) = Grade Point (GP) x Credits …. For a Course
The Student passes the Subject/Course only when he gets GP  4 (P Grade or above).
The Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) is calculated by dividing the Sum of Credit
Points (CP)secured from ALL Subjects/Courses registered in a Semester, by the Total
Number of Credits registered during that Semester. SGPA is rounded off to TWO
Decimal Places. SGPA is thus computed as
SGPA = { }/{ } ….For each Semester,
where ‘i’ is the Subject indicator index (takes into account all Subjects in a Semester),
‘N’ is the no. of Subjects ‘REGISTERED’ for the Semester (as specifically required and
listed under the Course Structure of the parent Department), is the no. of Credits
allotted to that ix Subject, and represents the Grade Points (GP) corresponding to the
Letter Grade awarded for that i Subject.
The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is a measure of the overall cumulative
performance of a student over all Semesters considered for registration. The CGPA is the
ratio of the Total Credit Points secured by a student in ALL registered Courses in ALL
Semesters, and the Total Number of Credits registered in ALL the Semesters. CGPA is
rounded off to TWO Decimal Places. CGPA is thus computed from the I Year Second
Semester onwards, at the end of each Semester, as per the formula
CGPA = { }/{ } … for all S Semesters registered
(i.e., upto and inclusive of S Semesters, S  2),
where ‘M’ is the TOTAL no. of Subjects (as specifically required and listed under the
Course Structure of the parent Department) the Student has ‘REGISTERED’ from the 1st
Semester onwards upto and inclusive of the Semester S (obviously M > N ), ‘j’ is the
Subject indicator index (takes into account all Subjects from 1 to S Semesters), is the
no. of Credits allotted to the jth Subject, and represents the Grade Points (GP)
corresponding to the Letter Grade awarded for that jth Subject. After registration and

MLR Institute of Technology Page 42


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

completion of I Year I Semester however, the SGPA of that Semester itself may be taken
as the CGPA, as there are no cumulative effects.
For Merit Ranking or Comparison Purposes or any other listing, ONLY the ‘ROUNDED
OFF’values of the CGPAs will be used.
For Calculations listed in Item 12.6–12.10, performance in failed Subjects/Courses
(securing F Grade) will also be taken into account, and the Credits of such
Subjects/Courses will also be included in the multiplications and summations. However,
Mandatory Courses will not be taken into consideration.

DECLARATION OF RESULTS
7.3 Computation of SGPA and CGPA are done using the procedure listed in 12.6– 2.10.

WITH HOLDING OF RESULTS


If the student has not paid fees to College at any stage, or has pending dues against his
name due to any reason what so ever, or if any case of indiscipline is pending against
him, the result of the student may be withheld, and he will not be allowed to go into the
next higher Semester. The Award or issue of the Degree may also be withheld in such
cases.

SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS
Supplementary examinations will be conducted immediately after the declaration of the
regular examinations results for those who absent or appeared and failed in regular
examinations. Such candidates writing supplementary examinations may have to write
more than one examination per day.

TRANSCRIPTS
After successful completion of prerequisite credits for the award of degree a Transcript
containing performance of all academic years will be issued as a final record. Duplicate
transcripts will also be issued if required after the payment of requisite fee and also as per
norms in vogue.

RULES OF DISCIPLINE
a Any attempt by any student to influence the teachers, Examiners, faculty and staff of
controller of Examination for undue favours in the exams, and bribing them either for
marks or attendance will be treated as malpractice cases and the student can be debarred
from the college.
b When the student absents himself, he is treated as to have appeared and obtained zero
marks in that subject(s) and grading is done accordingly.
c When the performance ofthe student in any subject(s) is cancelled as a punishment for
indiscipline, he is awarded zero marks in that subject(s).
d When the student’s answer book is confiscated for any kind of attempted or suspected
malpractice the decision of the Examiner is final.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 43


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

MALPRACTICE PREVENTION COMMITTEE


A malpractice prevention committee shall be constituted to examine and punish the
students who does malpractice / behaves indiscipline in examinations. The committee
shall consist of:
a) Controller of examinations - Chairman
b) Addl. Controller of examinations.- Member Convenor
c) Subject expert - member
d) Head of the department of which the student belongs to. - Member
e) The invigilator concerned - member
The committee shall conduct the meeting after taking explanation of the student and
punishment will be awarded by following the malpractice rules meticulously.
Any action on the part of candidate at the examination like trying to get undue advantage
in the performance at examinations or trying to help another, or derive the same through
unfair means is punishable according to the provisions contained hereunder. The
involvement of the Staff who are in charge of conducting examinations, valuing
examination papers and preparing / keeping records of documents relating to the
examinations, in such acts (inclusive of providing incorrect or misleading information)
that infringe upon the course of natural justice to one and all concerned at the
examination shall be viewed seriously and will be recommended for appropriate
punishment after thorough enquiry.

TRANSITORY REGULATIONS
Student who has discontinued for any reason, or has been detained for want of attendance
or lack of required credits as specified, or who has failed after having undergone the
Degree Programme, may be considered eligible for readmission to the same
Subjects/Courses(or equivalent Subjects/Courses, as the case may be), and same
Professional Electives/Open Electives (or from set/category of Electives or equivalents
suggested, as the case may be) as and when they are offered(within the time-frame of 8
years from the Date of Commencement of his I Year I Semester).

STUDENT TRANSFERS
There shall be no Branch transfers after the completion of Admission Process.

GRADUATION DAY
The College shall have its own Annual Graduation Dayfor the award of Degrees issued
by the University.

AWARD OF MEDALS

MLR Institute of Technology Page 44


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Institute will award Medals to the outstanding students who complete the entire course in
the first attempt within the stipulated time.

SCOPE
i) Where the words “he”, “him”, “his”, occur in the write-up of regulations, they include
“she”, “her”.
ii) Where the words “Subject” or “Subjects”, occur in these regulations, they also imply
“Course” or “Courses”.
iii) The Academic Regulations should be read as a whole, for the purpose of any
interpretation.
iv) In case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision
of the Chairman of the Academic Council is final.
The Academic Council may change or amend the Academic Regulations, Course
Structure or Syllabi at any time, and the changes or amendments made shall be
applicable to all Students with effect from the dates notified by the Academic Council
Authorities.

Academic Regulations for B. Tech. (Lateral Entry Scheme)


(Effective for the students getting admitted into II year from the Academic Year 2016-2017
on wards)

1. The Students have to acquire 132 credits from II to IV year of B.Tech Program (Regular) for
the award of the degree.

2. Students, who fail to fulfil the requirement for the award of the degree in 6 consecutive
academic years from the year of admission, shall forfeit their seat.

3. The same attendance regulations are to be adopted as that of B. Tech. (Regular).

4. Promotion Rule:
The student shall be promoted from third year to fourth year only if he fulfils the
academic requirements of 44 out of 88 credits from all the exams conducted upto and
including III year II semester regular examinations, whether the candidate takes the
examinations or not.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 45


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

5. Award of Class:
After the student has satisfied the requirements prescribed for the completion of the
program and is eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree he shall be placed in one of the
following four classes: The marks obtained in the best 132 credits will be considered for
the calculation of percentage and award of class shall be shown separately.

6. All other regulations as applicable for B. Tech. Four-year degree course (Regular) will hold
good for B.Tech (Lateral Entry Scheme).

MALPRACTICES RULES- DISCIPLINARY ACTIONFOR /IMPROPER CONDUCT


IN EXAMINATIONS

S. Nature of Malpractices/Improper
Punishment
No Conduct
Possesses or keeps accessible in
examination hall, any paper, note book,
programmable calculators, Cell phones,
pager, palm computers or any other form
of material concerned with or related to Expulsion from the examination hall and
1
the subject of the examination (theory or cancellation of the performance in that
(a)
practical) in which he is appearing but has subject only.
not made use of (material shall include
any marks on the body of the candidate
which can be used as an aid in the subject
of the examination)
Gives assistance or guidance or receives it Expulsion from the examination hall and
from any other candidate orally or by any cancellation of the performance in that
other body language methods or subject only of all the candidates
(b)
communicates through cell phones with involved. In case of an outsider, he will be
any candidate or persons in or outside the handed over to the police and a case is
exam hall in respect of any matter. registered against him.
Expulsion from the examination hall and
Has copied in the examination hall from
cancellation of the performance in that
any paper, book, programmable
subject and all other subjects the
calculators, palm computers or any other
2 candidate has already appeared including
form of material relevant to the subject of
practical examinations and project work
the examination (theory or practical) in
and shall not be permitted to appear for
which the candidate is appearing.
the remaining examinations of the

MLR Institute of Technology Page 46


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

subjects of that Semester/year. The Hall


Ticket of the candidate is to be cancelled
and sent to the Principal.

The candidate who has impersonated shall


be expelled from examination hall. The
candidate is also debarred and forfeits the
seat. The performance of the original
candidate who has been impersonated,
shall be cancelled in all the subjects of the
examination (including practical’s and
project work) already appeared and shall
not be allowed to appear for examinations
Impersonates any other candidate in
3 of the remaining subjects of that
connection with the examination.
semester/year. The candidate is also
debarred for two consecutive semesters
from class work and all examinations. The
continuation of the course by the
candidate is subject to the academic
regulations in connection with forfeiture
of seat. If the imposter is an outsider, he
will be handed over to the police and a
case is registered against him.
Expulsion from the examination hall and
cancellation of performance in that subject
and all the other subjects the candidate
has already appeared including practical
examinations and project work and shall
Smuggles in the Answer book or
not be permitted for the remaining
additional sheet or takes out or arranges
examinations of the subjects of that
4 to send out the question paper during the
semester/year. The candidate is also
examination or answer book or additional
debarred for two consecutive semesters
sheet, during or after the examination.
from class work and all examinations. The
continuation of the course by the
candidate is subject to the academic
regulations in connection with forfeiture
of seat.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 47


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Uses objectionable, abusive or offensive


language in the answer paper or in letters Cancellation of the performance in that
5
to the examiners or writes to the examiner subject.
requesting him to award pass marks.
Refuses to obey the orders of the Addl.
Controller of examinations / any officer
on duty or misbehaves or creates
disturbance of any kind in and around the
examination hall or organizes a walk out
or instigates others to walk out, or
threatens the addl. Controller of
In case of students of the college, they
examinations or any person on duty in or
shall be expelled from examination halls
outside the examination hall of any injury
and cancellation of their performance in
to his person or to any of his relations
that subject and all other subjects the
whether by words, either spoken or
candidate(s) has (have) already appeared
written or by signs or by visible
and shall not be permitted to appear for
6 representation, assaults the addl.
the remaining examinations of the
Controller of examinations, or any person
subjects of that semester/year. The
on duty in or outside the examination hall
candidates also are debarred and forfeit
or any of his relations, or indulges in any
their seats. In case of outsiders, they will
other act of misconduct or mischief which
be handed over to the police and a police
result in damage to or destruction of
case is registered against them.
property in the examination hall or any
part of the College campus or engages in
any other act which in the opinion of the
officer on duty amounts to use of unfair
means or misconduct or has the tendency
to disrupt the orderly conduct of the
examination.
Expulsion from the examination hall and
cancellation of performance in that subject
and all the other subjects the candidate has
already appeared including practical
Leaves the exam hall taking away answer
examinations and project work and shall
script or intentionally tears of the script or
7 not be permitted for the remaining
any part thereof inside or outside the
examinations of the subjects of that
examination hall.
semester/year. The candidate is also
debarred for two consecutive semesters
from class work and all examinations. The
continuation of the course by the

MLR Institute of Technology Page 48


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

candidate is subject to the academic


regulations in connection with forfeiture
of seat.

Expulsion from the examination hall and


cancellation of the performance in that
subject and all other subjects the
candidate has already appeared including
Possess any lethal weapon or firearm in
8 practical examinations and project work
the examination hall.
and shall not be permitted for the
remaining examinations of the subjects of
that semester/year. The candidate is also
debarred and forfeits the seat.
Student of the colleges expulsion from the
examination hall and cancellation of the
performance in that subject and all other
subjects the candidate has already
If student of the college, who is not a
appeared including practical examinations
candidate for the particular examination
and project work and shall not be
or any person not connected with the
9 permitted for the remaining examinations
college indulges in any malpractice or
of the subjects of that semester/year. The
improper conduct mentioned in clause 6
candidate is also debarred and forfeits the
to 8.
seat. Person(s)who do not belong to the
College will be handed over to police and,
a police case will be registered against
them.
Expulsion from the examination hall and
cancellation of the performance in that
subject and all other subjects the
Comes in a drunken condition to the candidate has already appeared including
10
examination hall. practical examinations and project work
and shall not be permitted for the
remaining examinations of the subjects of
that semester/year.
Copying detected on the basis of internal Cancellation of the performance in that
11
evidence, such as, during valuation or subject and all other subjects the

MLR Institute of Technology Page 49


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

during special scrutiny. candidate has appeared including practical


examinations and project work of that
semester/year examinations.
If any malpractice is detected which is not
covered in the above clauses 1 to 11 shall
12
be reported to the principal for further
action to award suitable punishment.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 50


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

7.COURSE CALENDAR FOR THE YEAR

MLR Institute of Technology Page 51


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

8.III YEAR I SEMESTER COURSE STRUCTURE

III B.Tech.- I SEMESTER


Hours per Scheme of Examination
Course Course Week Maximum Marks
Course Title Credits
Code Area Internal External
L T P Total
(CIE) (SEE)
A12112 Aerospace Propulsion - I PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
High Speed
A12113 PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Aerodynamics
A12114 Flight mechanics - II PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Aerospace Vehicle
A12115 PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Structures-II
OPEN ELECTIVE - I PC 3 1 - 3 25 75 100
Aircraft Computer Aided
A12119 PC 1 - 3 3 25 75 100
Drafting Lab
A12120 Propulsion Lab PC - - 3 2 25 50 75
Aerospace Vehicle
A12121 PC - - 3 2 25 50 75
Structures Lab
Total 16 05 09 22 200 525 725
Mandatory Course (Non-Credit)
Technical Seminar-
III(Micro
A12155 MC - - 2 0 25 50 75
Project/EPICS/Certificati
on)

Note: All End Examinations (Theory and Practical) are of three hours duration.
L – Lecture P- Practical C – Credits

MLR Institute of Technology Page 52


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Aerospace propulsion-I

9. COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A12112


Course Title AEROSPACE PROPULSION –I

Course Code A12112


Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits
Course Structure
4 0 - 4
Course Coordinator B PRAVEEN
Team of Instructors B PRAVEEN

9.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:


The course are to develop an understanding of how air-breathing engines and chemical rockets produce
thrust; an ability to do overall engine performance analysis calculations; an ability to carry out
performance calculations for individual engine components; an ability to carry out performance analysis
for chemical rockets; an understanding of elementary overall engine design considerations. Aerospace
propulsion-I is the subject which deals with engines which are used in travelling at higher mach regimes.
It introduces the students the advanced concepts of propulsions such as ram jet engines, scram jet engines
and rocket engine. This course provides both theoretical and problematic nature of the subject which
includes advanced topics like electric propulsion, nuclear propulsion, combustion stability in rockets ,
flutter, buffering , et
9.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites


1. Basics of
Thermodynamics
UG 4 4 2. Aerodynamics
3. Materials

9.3 MARKs DISTRIBUTIONS:

University End Total


Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):
There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm
examination consists of one objective paper, one subjective
paper and four assignments. The objective
75 100
paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10 marks,
with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for objective
and 60 minutes for subjective paper).
Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice

MLR Institute of Technology Page 53


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper


contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of
which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each question
carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination shall be
conducted for 2.5 units of syllabus and second
midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5 units.
5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two assignments
should be submitted before the
conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments
should be submitted before the conduct of the second mid. The
total marks secured by the student in each midterm
examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average of the
two midterm examinations shall be taken as the final marks
secured by each candidate.

9.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks


1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20
2 I Assignment lot 5
3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20
4 II Assignment lot 5
MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s
5 External Examination 3 hours 75
Total 75

9.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES AND OUTCOMES

S. No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment method (s)

Ability to understand the


a understand the basics of PPT, BLACK BOARD
thermodynamic cycles

Ability to analyze the problems PPT, BLACK BOARD,


b
in centrifugal compressors Assignment

Ability to understand the


c relation between the Axial and PPT, BLACK BOARD
centrifugal compressors

Ability to understand
d thethermoeffetcson PPT, BLACK BOARD
thematerials of the blades of

MLR Institute of Technology Page 54


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

compressors

Ability to understand the


e Derivatives of the the velocity PPT, BLACK BOARD
triangles equations

S.no course objectives course outcomes Blooms


Level
1 Describethe basics of thermodynamic cycles To describethe basics of 1
thermodynamic cycles
2 Understandthe the problems in centrifugal To understand the the 2
compressors problems in centrifugal
compressors
3 Applythe Basic relation between the Axial and To understand and apply the 2
centrifugal compressors Basic relation between the
Axial and centrifugal
compressors
4 Examinethe Derivatives of the the velocity To examinethe Derivatives of 3
triangles equations the the velocity triangles
equations
5 Explainthe Elements of Engine performance To understandanddevelop 3
the Elements of Engine
performance

9.6HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:


Proficiency
Program Outcomes Level
assessed by
An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematical
Assignments
foundations, algorithmic principles, and computer science and
Midterm and
A engineering theory in the modeling and design of computer- H
University
based systems to real-world problems (fundamental
examinations
engineering analysis skills)
Assignments
An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to Midterm and
B H
analyze and interpret data (information retrieval skills) University
examinations

MLR Institute of Technology Page 55


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

An ability to design , implement, and evaluate a computer-


Assignments
based system, process, component, or program to meet desired
Midterm and
C needs, within realistic constraints such as economic, S
University
environmental, social, political, health and safety,
examinations
manufacturability, and sustainability (Creative Skills)
An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams
D N --
(team work)
Assignments
An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and use
Midterm and
E the appropriate computing and engineering requirements for H
University
obtaining its solution (engineering problem solving skills)
examinations
An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and
F social N --
issues and responsibilities (professional integrity)
An ability to communicate effectively both in writing and
G orally N --
(speaking / writing skills)
The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global
impact of computing and engineering solutions on individuals,
H N --
organizations, and society (engineering impact assessment
skills)
Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in Assignments
continuing Midterm and
I H
professional development and life-long learning (continuing University
education awareness) examinations
J A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social awareness) N --
An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary
for
K computing and engineering practice (practical engineering N --
analysis
skills)
Assignments
An ability to apply design and development principles in the
Midterm and
L construction of software and hardware systems of varying S
University
complexity (software hardware interface)
examinations
An ability to recognize the importance of professional
development by pursuing postgraduate studies or face
M competitive examinations that offer challenging and rewarding N --
careers in computing (successful career and immediate
employment).

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

MLR Institute of Technology Page 56


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

9.7 SYLLABUS
UNIT - I

Engines, Types Introduction to IC Engines Types of Reciprocating Engine (SI, CI), Piston
Engine Thermodynamic Cycles, Piston Rings, Crank Casing, Rotation Mechanisms.
Airbreathing Engines, types Working of Gas Turbine Engine, Cycle Representation

Fundamentals Of Gas Turbine: EnginesThermodynamic Cycle of Gas Turbine Engine,


Industrial Gas turbines, Types Advantages, Disadvantages Application to Industry Based,
Aerospace Thrust, TSFC, SFC, Mass Flow rate Numerical Problems on Gas Turbine Basic
Cycle, CI Engine, SI Engine

UNIT – II

AIR BREATHING ENGINES FOR AIRPLANES Characteristics of turboprop, turbojet,


Turbofan, Performance parameters characteristics ThrustSingle Two-Shaft Turbojet & Turbo-
prop, Turbofan Engines. Engine Design Operations. Engine - Design Point Operations.
Principles, Aerothermodynamics Process involved in Turbo& Ram Air engines and Pulsejets in
Aircraft propulsion. Ideal Cycle Analysis for Turbojet Engine, Turbofan Engine, Turboprop
Engine, Real Analysis for Turbojet Engine, Turbofan Engine, Turbo Prop Engine. Numerical
Problems.

UNIT-III

INLETS & COMPRESSORS

Subsonic Inlets, Flow Characteristics, Governing Equations of Inlets,Stall in Subsonic inlets,.


Relation between minimum area ratio and external deceleration ratio. Diffuser performance.
Supersonic Inlets, Inlet Guide Vanes, Characteristics of IGV‘s

Axial Flow Compressors: Elementary theory of axial flow compressor, Velocity triangles,
Degree of reaction. Flow through an Axial flow Compressor stage; Losses in axial flow
compressor stage;Compressor blade design. Losses and Blade Single and Multi-stage Axial
compressor characteristics HPC,LPC Design.

UNIT-IV COMBUSTION CHAMBER, BURNERS AND PERFORMANCE: Classification


of combustion process, important factors affecting combustion chamber design, Combustion
chamber performance.Combustor liner materials and thermal barrier coatings. Thermochemistry
of combustion, Chemical Equilibrium, Premixed Flame and flame stabilization, Jet Diffusion
flame and droplet combustion, Flame Propagation,Chemical composition of Fuels in Aviation,
BioFuels, Advanced Combustion Chemistry (Numerical problems on fuel compositions)Burners,
Types of Burners, Materials for Combustion Chamber, Thermal Conduction, Convection,
MLR Institute of Technology Page 57
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Heating & Cooling methodologies Performance Sensitivity, Flame Tube Cooling, Flame
Stabilization. Use of Flame Holders, Afterburners Ignition methods for GT afterburners

UNIT – V TURBINES & NOZZLES

Axial Flow Turbines: Introduction; Turbine stage; Turbine Blade 2-D (cascade) analysis Work
Done; Degree of Reaction; Losses and Efficiency; Flow Passage; Subsonic, transonic and
supersonic turbines, Multi-staging of Turbine, Turbine Cooling; Turbine Blade design& Profiles,
Airfoil Data and Profile construction. Radial Turbine: Introduction; Thermodynamics and
Aerodynamics of radial turbines; Radial Turbine Characteristics; Losses and efficiency; Design of
radial turbine Numerical Problems .

Nozzles: Nozzle Types, Nozzle Throat Conditions.Nozzle Efficiency, Losses In Nozzles. Nozzle
Expansion Process Ejector and Variable Area Nozzles, Thrust Reversal thrust Vectoring, Noise
reduction methods.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ahmed F EL Sayed 2008 ―Aircraft Propulsion and Gas Turbine Engines‖, CRC Press LLC
2. Ronald D. Flack (2010), Fundamentals of Jet Propulsion with Application, Cambridge
University Press, USA.
3. H. I. H. Saravanamuttoo, Cohen H. Rogers (2009), Gas Turbine Theory, 6th edition, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, India.
4. V. Ganesan (2010), Gas Turbines, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Oates G. C (1986), AeroThermodyanamics of Aircraft Engine Components, AIAA Education
Series, USA.
2. Rolls- Royce (2005),Jet Engine, 6th edition, Rolls - Royce Ltd, USA.
3. A. S. Burack (2011), Gas Turbines and Jet and Rocket Propulsion, Goldberg Press, New York.
4. Saeed Farokhi (2009), Aircraft Propulsion, 2nd edition, John Wiley, USA.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 58


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

9.8 SESSION PLANNER

UNIT NO: I Expected date of completion:


References Text
Lecture Date Subject
Books Journals
No. Planned Topics / Sub-Topics
Websites
Role of reciprocating engines, operating Envelop of
1
flight vehicles,.
T1
T1
2 Air breathing engines-types, Engine operational limits
T2
3 Aircraft gas turbine engines operating principles

4 Aircraft gas turbine engines-types


T2
T1
5 Distinguishing features- schematic diagrams
T1
6 Engine components- function.

7 Schematic diagram station numbering. T1

8 Thrust generation- momentum equations.


T2
9 Thrust T1

Engine performance parameters- specific thrust. T1


10
specific fuel consumption Overall efficiency
11 Effect of fight conditions, jet exit speed, exit pressure T1

12 Role of propulsion in aircraft performance T1

Criteria for engine selection, airframe-engine


13
matching. T1
Total No. of
Periods

UNIT NO: II Expected date of completion:

MLR Institute of Technology Page 59


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

References Text
Lecture Date Subject
Books Journals
No. Planned Topics / Sub-Topics
Websites

14 22-07-17 Engine components- performance requirements


T1
T1
17 25-07-17 Thermodynamic processes

16 27-07-17 Performance and Efficiencies T2

17 29-07-17 Under and over expansion


T2
T1
18 01-08-17 Cycle representation –Turbojet

19 03-08-17 Cycle representation – Turbojet with reheat T1

20 04-08-17 Cycle representation –Turbofan T1

21 05-08-17 Thermal Efficiency- application to thrust equation


T2
22 08-08-17 Parametric cycle analysis T1

23 10-08-17 Engine design choices & design constraints T1

24 10-08-17 Determination of engine design point


T1
25 12-08-17 Flight operating parameters T1

Ideal turbojet and turbofan engines.


26 17-08-17
T1
Total No. of
Periods

UNIT NO: III Expected date of completion:


References Text
Lecture Date Subject
Books Journals
No. Planned Topics / Sub-Topics
Websites

27 18-08-17 Types of Flow


T1
28 19-08-17 Governing Equation of Flows T1

MLR Institute of Technology Page 60


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

29 22-08-17 Subsonic Inlets T2

30 22-08-17 Flow Distortion and Flow Losses


T2
31 31-08-17 Supersonic Inlets T1

32 31-08-17 Flow losses & performance characteristics T1

33 02-09-17 Exhaust Nozzles T1

34 07-09-17 Thrust Reversing & Thrust Vectoring


T2
35 07-09-17 Equations for Nozzle Flows T1

36 08-09-17 Burners and its components T1

37 09-09-17 Fuel injection, Atomization, Vaporization


T1
Recirculation- flame stabilization, flame holders. T1
38 12-09-17
components, design requirements, design parameters
39 14-09-17 Afterburners, function
T1
40 14-09-17 Turbine Engine Fuels
Total No. of
Periods

UNIT NO: IV Expected date of completion:


References Text
Lecture Date Subject
Books Journals
No. Planned Topics / Sub-Topics
Websites

41 17-09-17 Axial Flow Compressors- Operating Principle


T1
T1
42 16-09-17 Euler's Turbo-Machinery Equations

43 19-09-17 Velocity Diagram T2

44 21-09-17 Flow Losses


T2
45 21-09-17 Axial Flow Turbines T1

46 22-09-17 Velocity Diagram Analysis T1

MLR Institute of Technology Page 61


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

47 23-09-17 Flow Losses T1

48 26-09-17 Ideal And Real Compressors


T2
49 28-09-17 Ideal And Real Turbine T1

50 28-09-17 Blades for Compressor and Turbine T1

51 29-09-17 Cascade Blade Geometry


T1
52 30-09-17 Initial Flow Conditions T1

53 03-10-17 Turbine Speed, Multi-Staging, Multi-Spooling


T1
54 05-10-17 Compressor-Turbine Rotation rpm distribution
Total No. of
Periods

UNIT NO: V Expected date of completion:


References Text
Lecture Date Subject
Books Journals
No. Planned Topics / Sub-Topics
Websites

55 05-10-17 Non-dimensionalisation and correction of engine


T1
56 05-10-17 Component characteristic parameters T1

57 06-10-17 Performance analysis of compressor T2

58 07-10-17 Performance fan burner, turbine, exhaust nozzle


T2
59 10-10-17 Relations of Performance Parameters T1

60 12-10-17 Engine Controls T1

61 12-10-17 Off design performance of compressor T1

62 12-10-17 Component matching & its significance.


T2
63 12-10-17 choked turbine and exhaust nozzle flow T1

64 13-10-17 Turbine inlet temperature as control parameter T1

MLR Institute of Technology Page 62


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

65 14-10-17 Effect of exhaust nozzle area, turbine inlet vane


T1
Component matching for gas generator, turbo jet T1
66 14-10-17
engine.
Engine performance maps. Use of matching data to
67 17-10-17
second stage design. T1
68 17-10-17 Review of aircraft-engine matching
Total No. of
68 68
Periods

9.6 .MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE


ACHIEVEMENT OFPROGRAMOUTCOMES:

CourseObj Program
ectives A B C D E Foutcomes
G H I J K L M
I H S S H
II S H H S S
III H
IV H S H S
V S H S
VI S
VII H S
VI H S
III
IX S H H

S=Supportive H=HighlyRelated

9.10.MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE


ACHIEVEMENT OFPROGRAMOUTCOMES:

Course Program outcomes


Outcomes A B C D E F G H I J K L M
a
b S S S
c H H H
d H
e
f S S
g S S S
h H H H
i S H

MLR Institute of Technology Page 63


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

S=Supportive H=HighlyRelative

XI OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT-I

1. A main objective of by-pass in a turbo-fan engine is to increase (A)


(A) mass flow rate through engine inlet
(B) turbine inlet temperature
(C) mass flow rate through exhaust nozzle
(D) compressor pressure ratio

2. Thermodynamic cycle on which the jet engine operates can be (B)


(A) open Rankine cycle only
(B) either open or closed Rankine cycle
(C) open Brayton cycle only
(D) either open or closed Brayton cycle

3. Propulsion efficiency of a jet engine is (C)


(A) directly proportional to both the thrust power and the air mass flow rate
(B) inversely proportional to both the thrust power and the air mass flow rate
(C) directly proportional to the thrust power and inversely proportional to the air mass flow rate
(D) inversely proportional to the thrust power and directly proportional to the air mass flow rate

4. Which of the following engines should be used by a subsonic passenger transport airplane for
minimum specific fuel consumption? (C)
(A) Turbojet with after burner
(B) Turbofan
(C) Ramjet
(D) Scramjet

5. On which one of the following thermodynamic cycles does an ideal ramjet engine operate?
(A) The Rankine Cycle (B)
(B) The Brayton Cycle
(C) The Carnot Cycle
(D) The Otto Cycle

6. The Purpose of an injection system in the combustor is (A)


(A) To accelerate the flow in the combustor
(B) To increase the stagnation pressure of the fuel air mixture
(C) To ignite the fuel air mixture
(D) To convert the bulk fuel into tiny droplets

MLR Institute of Technology Page 64


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

7. A turbojet engine is operating with afterburner off. If the afterburner is switched on, then
(A) Both thrust and sfc decreases (C)
(B) Thrust increases and sfc decreases
(C) Thrust decreases and sfc increases
(D) Both thrust and sfc increases

8. The division of feed air to an aircraft gas turbine combustor into primary and secondary
streams serves which of the following purposes. (B)
P: a flammable mixture can be formed
Q: cooling of combustor liner and flame tube can be accomplished
R: Specific fuel consumption can be reduced
(A) P and R
(B) Q and R
(C) P and Q
(D) P,Q and R

9. Thrust available from a Turbojet Engine (C)


(A) Increases as altitude increases
(B) Increases upto the tropopause and then decreases
(C) Remains constant at all altitudes
(D) Decreases as altitude increases

10. The ratio of flight speed to the exhaust velocity for maximum propulsion efficiency is
(A) 0.0 (D)
(B) 0.5
(C) 1.0
(D) 2.0

11. The propulsive efficiency of a turbojet engine moving at velocity of V0 and having exhaust
velocity Ve with respect to the engine is given by (A)
(A)

(B)
(C)
(D)

12. A gas turbine engine is mounted on an aircraft which can attain a maximum altitude of 11 km
from sea level. The combustor volume of this engine is decided based on conditions at
(A) sea level (B)
(B) 8 km altitude
(C) 5.5 km altitude
(D) 11 km altitude

MLR Institute of Technology Page 65


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

13. For a given fuel flow rate and thermal efficiency, the take-off thrust for a gas turbine engine
burning aviation turbine fuel (considering fuel-air ratiof<<1) is (A) Directly proportional to
exhaust velocity (B) Inversely proportional to exhaust velocity (C) Independent of exhaust
velocity (D) Directly proportional to the square of the exhaust velocity><1) is (C)
(A) Directly proportional to exhaust velocity
(B) Inversely proportional to exhaust velocity
(C) Independent of exhaust velocity
(D) Directly proportional to the square of the exhaust velocity
14. The thrust produced by a turbojet engine (B)
(A) Increases with increasing compressor pressure ratio
(B) Decreases with increasing compressor pressure ratio
(C) Remains constant with increasing compressor pressure ratio
(D) First increases and then decreases with increasing compressor pressure ratio

17. Turbo prop engines have (A)


(A) Lower thrust at take off
(B) Less frontal area
(C) Difficult to maintain
(D) None of the above

16. Performance of an ideal cycle power plant pertain to (B)


(A) Work output
(B) Efficiency
(C) Specific fuel consumption
(D) All the above

17. For the following cycles operating between the same temperature limits, the one which will
have the maximum efficiency is
(A) Otto cycle (C)
(B) Carnot cycle
(C) Brayton cycle
(D) Diesel cycle

18. The useful power output for the propulsion cycle is from (D)
(A) Inlet diffuser
(B) Out let Nozzle
(C) Turbine
(D) Compressor

19. The working of jet propulsion is based on (B)


(A) Impulse turbine
(B) Centrifugal principle
(C) Reaction principle
(D) Centripetal principle

MLR Institute of Technology Page 66


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

20. The difference between air breathing engine and rocket engine are
(A) There is altitude limit
(B) There is temperature limit
(C) Atmospheric air is used for formation of the jet
(D) All the above

UNIT-II

1. Turbulence level of fluid flow inside the turbomachines is indicated by [C]

a) Mach Number
b) Prandlt Number
c) Reynolds Number
d) Engine RPM

2. Polytropic Efficiency is define for a thermodynamic process when: [B]

a) Fluid is incompressible
b) Cp, Cv, R are constant
c) Isothermal

3. Isentropic Efficiency is defined for Thermodynamic processes which are [C]

a) Isentropic Processes
b) Compressible Fluids
c) Adiabatic

4. Common feature of axial and centrifugal compressor is that work is done on the fluid by: [B]

a) Radial acceleration
b) Tangential Acceleration
c) Axial Acceleration of Flow

5. Slip Factor definition of a forward curved centrifugal compressors is [D]

a) 1.00
b) -1.00
c) >1.00
d) Slip Factor does not apply

6. Symmetrical Blading in axial flow machines mean [C]

a) Symmetrical airfoils are used


b) All blade elements are set at 450 angle
c) Rotor and Stator Flow angles at any radial section are equal and mirror images

7. Compressors when working with degree of reaction of -0.1: [B]

a) Stalls

MLR Institute of Technology Page 67


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

b) Works like a turbine


c) Chokes
d) Not possible

8. Typical overall efficiency of a Gas Turbine Aircraft Engine is [C]

a) 10%
b) 25%
c) 40%
d) 70%

9. Efficiencies (Isentropic) of most modern turbines are of the order of [C]

a) 75%
b) 85%
c) 90%
d) 95%

10. Gas Turbine are usually [C]

a) Pure Impulse Turbines


b) Pure Reaction Turbines
c) Combination of Two

11. Discharge velocity from the centrifugal fan impeller is highest for [B]

a) Radial Vaned
b) Forward Curved
c) Backward Curved vanes

12. Work Done by an axial compressor or turbine is decided by [D]

a) Axial Velocity
b) Blade Speed
c) Blade Camber
d) All of (a) to (c)
e) Blade Camber plus Blade Twist

13. Camber of a typical subsonic axial turbine blade profile is of the order of [D]

a) 170
b) 300
c) 450
d) 900
e) 1350

14. The Propulsive efficiency of highest in aircraft application for [C]

a) Turbojet Engine
b) Turbofan Engine

MLR Institute of Technology Page 68


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

c) Turboprop Engine
15. In a gas turbine engine the compressor and turbine must be matched in [D]

a) RPM
b) Mass Flow
c) Work done
d) All of them

16. Slip in a centrifugal Compressor can be reduced by [B]

a) Decreasing the number of vanes


b) Increasing the number of vanes
c) Increasing the length of the vanes
d) Decreasing vane thickness

17. Free Vortex Blade Design aims to achieve a balance of [B]

a) Axial Forces
b) Radial Forces
c) Tangential Forces
d) All of them

18. Specific thrust (per unit mass flow) of an aircraft engine can be increased by [D]

a) Increasing TET
b) Afterburning
c) Both Together
d) Any one

19. Specific fuel consumption can be reduced by [B]

a) Reheat
b) High Pressure Ratio
c) Both

20. Multi Staging of Turbomachines is preferred for axial over the centrifugal machines for
[B]
a) Ease of fabrication
b) Higher Efficiency
c) Less no of rotating parts

UNIT-III

1. First Law of Thermodynamics is related to [C]


a) conservation of mass
b) conservation of momentum
c) conservation of energy

2. The property that is an outcome of the zeroth law of thermodynamics is


MLR Institute of Technology Page 69
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

a) Pressure
b) Temperature
c) Mass
3. Enthalpy is a combination property that is equal to the sum of [C]
a) internal energy and entropy
b) entropy and flow energy
c) internal energy and flow energy

4. Heat and work interactions of a system are [A]

a) path functions
b) point function
c) properties

5. The minimum number of processes required for a cycle [B]


a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
6. Entropy generation in the universe is a measure of [A]
a) Irreversibility
b) Increase in enthalpy
c) Internal Energy
7. Jet Engine Cycle is based on [C]
a) Otto Cycle
b) Stirling Cycle
c) Brayton Cycle
8. The process that most closely describes an ideal compression process in a Brayton cycle is [C]
a) Isothermal
b) Isochoric
c) Isentropic
9. The combustion process in an ideal Brayton cycle is at [B]
a) Constant volume
b) constant pressure
c) constant entropy
10. The upper limit of efficiency for any heat engine is dictated by [A]
a) Carnot efficiency
b) Adiabatic efficiency
c) Isentropic efficiency
11. The useful power output for the propulsion cycle is from [B]
a) Inlet diffuser
b)Out let Nozzle

MLR Institute of Technology Page 70


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

c) Turbine
d) Compressor
12. The working of jet propulsion is based on [C]
a) Impulse turbine
b) Centrifugal principle
c) Reaction principle
d) Centripetal principle
13. The difference between air breathing engine and rocket engine are [D]
a) There is altitude limit
b) There is temperature limit
c) Atmospheric air is used for formation of the jet
d) All the above
14. Reciprocating Engine are not used in modern aircrafts due to [D]
a) High specific weight
b) High speed requirement
c) Large drop in power with altitude
d) All the above
15. Ramjet engines are highly suited for [B]
a) Subsonic application
b) Supersonic application
c) Hypersonic application
d) None of the above
16. Pressure rise in a ramjet is achieved by a [A]
a) Diffuser
b) Centrifugal compressor
c) Axial flow compressor
d) None of the above
17. Compared to a ramjet engine, a pulse jet engine has [D]
a) Higher propulsive efficiency
b) No altitude limitation
c) Larger life
d) None of the above
18. Turbo prop engines have [B]
a) Lower thrust at take off
b) Less frontal area
c) Difficult to maintain
d) None of the above
19. In a turbojet engine compared to momentum thrust, pressure thrust is [A]
a) Quite low
b) Quite high

MLR Institute of Technology Page 71


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

c) Almost equal
d) None of the above
20. The propulsion efficiency of a turbo jet engine as a function of speed ratio is given by [C]
a) 1+/2
b) 1-/2
c) 2/1+
d) 2/1-

UNIT-IV

1. Combustion in a gas turbine combustion system is at [B]


a) Constant volume
b) Constant pressure
c) Constant temperature
d) Constant enthalpy
2. Combustion process in a combustor is [A]
a) Isobaric
b) Isochoric
c) Isentropic
d) Isothermal
3. The recognized postulations as to the combustion mechanism in a combustion
chamber is due to [D]
a) Carbon preferential burning
b) Hydrogen preferential burning
c) Hydroxylation
d) All the above
4. Acceleration of the reaction in a Gas Turbine combustion system is brought about by
[C]
a) Bombardment of nucleus
b) Chain breaking
c) Chain branching
d) None of the above
5. Air- fuel ratio in a Gas Turbine is in the range of [D]
a) 20 to 30
b) 30 to 40
c) 40 to 60
d) 60 to 100
6. Large amount of combustion takes place in the combustor in [A]
a) Primary zone
b) Secondary zone

MLR Institute of Technology Page 72


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

c) Dilution zone
d) In all places
7. The outlet temperature of the combustor is around [A]
a) 1600 K
b) 1400 K
c) 1200 K
d) 1000 K
8. In the primary zone the air- fuel ratio is [B]
a) 13
b) 17
c) 17
d) 20
9. The major pollutant coming out of the combustion chamber is [C]
a) CO2
b) SO2
c) NOx
d) Unburnt Hydrocarbons
10. The maximum temperature from the combustor is limited because [D]
a) It is difficult to burn the fuel
b) The air-fuel ratio is too lean
c) Combustion chamber walls cannot sustain high temperature
d) Turbine blades cannot accept very high temperature
11. For aircraft application a compressor must have [C]
a) Low air flow capacity
b) High frontal area
c) High pressure ratio per stage
d) Low efficiency
12. Modern multistage axial flow compressors have a pressure ratio [D]
a) 2
b) 6
c) 12
d) 18
13. In the axial flow compressor the absolute velocity in the stator [B]
a) Increases
b)Decreases
c) Initially increases and the n decreases
d) Remains constant
14. In the axial flow compressor the absolute velocity in the rotor [A]
a) Increases
b) Decreases

MLR Institute of Technology Page 73


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

c) Initially increases and then decreases


d) Remains constant
15. The work absorbing capacity of an axial flow compressor [B]
a) Increases with increase in the axial velocity
b) Decreases with increase in the axial velocity
c) Remain the same with increase in the axial velocity
d) Has no relation between them
16. In a multistage axial flow compressor the axial velocity at higher stage is [A]
a) Small
b) High
c) Remains same
d) None of the above
17. The useful power output for the propulsion cycle is from [B]
a) Inlet diffuser
b) Outlet nozzle
c) Turbine
d) Compressor
18. The working jet propulsion is based on [C]
a) Impulse principle
b) Centrifugal principle
c) Reaction principle
d) Centripetal principle
19. The difference between airbreathing engine and rocket engine are [D]
a) There is altitude limit
b) There temperature limit
c) Atmospheric air is used for formation of the jet
d)All the above

20. Ramjet engines are highly suited for [B]


a) Subsonic application
b)Supersonic application
c) Hypersonic application
d) None of the above

UNIT-V

1. Turbulence level of fluid flow inside the turbomachines is indicated by [C]


a) Mach Number
b) Prandlt Number
c) Reynolds Number

MLR Institute of Technology Page 74


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

d) Engine RPM
2. Polytropic efficiency is defined for a thermodynamic process when [B]
a) Fluid is incompressible
b) Cp, Cv, R are constant
c) Isothermal
3. Isentropic efficiency is defined for thermodynamic processes which are [C]
a) Isentropic processes
b) Compressible Fluids
c) Adiabatic
4. Common feature of axial and centrifugal compressors is that work is done on the fluid by
[B]
a) Radial acceleration
b) Tangential acceleration
c) Axial Acceleration of flow
5. Slip factor definition of a forward curved centrifugal compressors is [D]
a) 1.00
b) -1.00
c) >1.00
d) Slip factor does not apply
6. Symmetrical blading in axial flow machines mean [C]
a) Symmetrical aerofoils are used
b) All blade elements are set at 450angle
c) Rotor and Stator flow angles at any radial section are equal and mirror images
7. Compressors when working with degree of reaction of - 0.1 [B]
a) Stalls
b) Works like a turbine
c) Chokes
d) Not possible
8. Typical overall efficiency of a gas turbine aircraft engine is [C]
a) 10%
b) 25%
c) 40%
d) 70%
9. Efficiencies (isentropic) of most modern turbines are of the order of [C]
a) 75%
b) 85%
c) 90%
d) 95%
10. Gas turbines are usually
a) Pure Impulse turbines

MLR Institute of Technology Page 75


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

b) Pure Reaction turbines


c) Combination of the two
11. Almost all aircraft power plant Intakes actually are [C]
a) Fixed geometry for subsonic aircraft and variable geometry for supersonic aircraft
b) Variable geometry for both subsonic and supersonic aircraft
c) Fixed geometry for both subsonic and supersonic aircraft
d) Convergent-Divergent fixed geometry for both subsonic and supersonic aircraft

12. Almost all aircraft engine Nozzles actually are [B]


a) Fixed geometry for subsonic aircraft and variable geometry for supersonic aircraft
b) Variable geometry for both subsonic and supersonic aircraft
c) Fixed geometry for both subsonic and supersonic aircraft
d) Convergent-Divergent fixed geometry for both subsonic and supersonic aircraft

13. For a Mach 2 aircraft the optimum 2-D intake design is most likely to be made with
following shock structure [B]
a) One normal shock at the intake entry
b) Two oblique shocks at the entry and one normal shock at the throat
c) Four oblique shocks through external and internal intake body and one normal shock
at the throat
d) A shock train with almost infinite number of shocks to decelerate the flow slowly and
finally a normal shock

14. Combustion in aircraft gas turbine enginesis normally sustained through [B]
a) Pre-mixed – i.e. air and fuel are mixed in a carburetor in correct proportion
b) Diffusion flames – where combustion occur at stoichiometric condition at the
flame front
c) With Hypergolic fuels – where the fuel combustion may take place spontaneously and
homogeniously
d) With continuous ignition by spark plugs inside the combustion chamber

15. Flame stabilization in aircraft gas turbine engines is normally done with the help of [C]
a) A streamlined body e.g. airfoil or ellipsoidal shaped body
b) A series of streamlined bodies strategically placed inside combustion chamber to
minimize pressure loss
c) One or more bluff bodies placed inside the combustion chamber
d) By strategic impingement of fuel with fuel injector inside the combustion chamber

16. Component matching in aircraft gas turbine engines is normally done through [B]
a) Normalized air mass flow matching at the chosen design point

MLR Institute of Technology Page 76


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

b) Matched points located at each component map to find minimum matched


operation
c) Entire component maps of all the component (Intake, Compr, Turbine etc) must be
completely matched with each other
d) Only Compressor – Turbine need to be matched ; Other components get automatically
matched

17. Off-design performance for most aircraft gas turbine engine occurs [A]
a) Whenever the aircraft is flying
b) Whenever the aircraft is not flying steady and level
c) During sever aircraft maneuvers e.g. diving and pullout
d) When the aircraft is flying through severe turbulence, thunder storm and rain

18. Ramjets and Pulsejets operate with open cycles as per [B]
a) Both operate on Jules cycles
b)One has a constant volume combustion and the other has a constant pressure
combustion
c) Both operate on Otto cycles
d) They operate with only half Braytoncycles – not on full cycles
19. Scramjet Propulsion system has [B]
a) All the flow inside the engine are in hypersonic speeds
b)All the flow inside the engine are in supersonic speeds
c) All the flow inside the engine are in subsonic speeds
d) The flow inside consists in parts of Hypersonic, Supersonic and Subsonic speeds
20. The thrust of a gas turbine engine is [A]
a) Directly proportional to the turbine inlet temperature
b) Inversely proportional to the turbine inlet temperature
c) Is independent of the turbine inlet temperature

MLR Institute of Technology Page 77


Dept. of AERO UNIT-I Student Hand Book
S.No Short Answer Type Blooms Taxonomy Level
Discuss the variation of flow in Under expansion
1 II
nozzle?
2 Write a note on Diffuser Losses? II
3 Explain the steps involved in the methods of mitigation? II
Determine the implication on Design Point of an
4 II
Engine?
Give the parameters involved in Design of a Gas
5 IV
Turbine Engine?
List the various performance parameters of Turbojet
6 IV
engine with expressions?
Define the Operating Principle of Turbojet engine with
7 I
Afterburner.
Write a short note on Dimensional Analysis and its
8 II
application.
Derive expression for Thermal Efficiency for Turbofan
9 III
Engine
Sketch the block diagram of Thermodynamic cycle
10 II
based Gas Turbine Engine
List the various performance parameters involved in
11 II
Design of Gas Turbine Engine
12 Explain the significance of Component Matching II
A Turbojet Power plant uses aviation fuel having
calorific value of 43MJ/kg. The fuel consumption is 0.18
kg per hr per N of thrust when the thrust is 9kN. The
13 III
aircraft velocity is 500m/s the mass of air passing
through the compressor is 27kg/s. Calculate the air to
fuel ratio.
A Turbojet Power plant uses aviation fuel having
calorific value of 34MJ/kg. The fuel consumption is 0.17
kg per hr per N of thrust when the thrust is 8kN. The
14 III
aircraft velocity is 450m/s the mass of air passing
through the compressor is 32kg/s. Calculate the air to
fuel ratio.
17 Write a short note on Flight Operating parameters. II
Determine the Thrust Equation in Turbojet using neat
16 II
sketch
Determine the Thrust Equation using Bypass Ratio
17 II
Turbofan using neat sketch
Explain the Design constraints involved in designing of
18 II
an engine.
List the various expressions for the Ideal Turbojet
19 II
Engines
List the various expressions for the Ideal Turbofan
20 II
Engines
S.No Long Answer Type Question Blooms Taxonomy Level

MLR Institute of Technology Page 78


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

In a Gas Turbine, the pressure ratio to which the air at


17oC is compressed at 6. The same air is then heated to
maximum permissible temperature of 750oC. First in a
heat exchanger and then combustion chamber. It is then
1 III
expanded in two stages such that the expansion work is
maximum. The air is reheated to 750oC after the first
stage. Determine the cycle thermal efficiency, the work
ratio and net shaft work per kg of air.
A Turbojet Engine aircraft flies at 920km/hr at an
altitude of 5500m where pa is 0.60bar and temperature is
-19 degree centigrade. The Compressor pressure ratio is
2 8 and maximum temperature at the combustor is 1000 III
degree centigrade. Assuming ideal conditions Estimate
the Compressor work, pressures and temperatures
throughout the cycle and exit jet velocity.
The Following data applies to a Turbojet aircraft flying
at an altitude of 6.1km.where the ambient conditions are
0.59 bar and 264K.
Speed of Aircraft 805km/s
Pressure Ratio of compressor 5:1
Combustion Chamber pressure losses 0.3 bar
Turbine inlet temperature 1300K
3 III
Intake duct efficiency 92%
Isentropic efficiency of Compressor 0.85
Isentropic efficiency of Turbine 0.90
Mechanical efficiency of transmission 99%
Nozzle efficiency 95%
Nozzle outlet area 0.0935m2
CV of fuel 46MJ/Kg
The Following data applies to a Turbojet aircraft flying
at an altitude of 6.1km.where the ambient conditions are
0.458 bar and 248K.
Speed of Aircraft 805km/s
Pressure Ratio of compressor 4:1
Combustion Chamber pressure losses 0.21 bar
Turbine inlet temperature 1100K
4 III
Intake duct efficiency 95%
Isentropic efficiency of Compressor 0.85
Isentropic efficiency of Turbine 0.90
Mechanical efficiency of transmission 99%
Nozzle efficiency 95%
Nozzle outlet area 0.0935m2
CV of fuel 43MJ/Kg
The Following data applies to a Turbojet aircraft flying
5 at an altitude of 6.1km.where the ambient conditions are III
0.458 bar and 248K.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 79


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Speed of Aircraft 805km/s


Pressure Ratio of compressor 4:1
Combustion Chamber pressure losses 0.21 bar
Turbine inlet temperature 1700K
Intake duct efficiency 90%
Isentropic efficiency of Compressor 0.85
Isentropic efficiency of Turbine 0.90
Mechanical efficiency of transmission 96%
Nozzle efficiency 92%
Nozzle outlet area 0.0935m2
CV of fuel 39MJ/Kg
Explain the cycle representation of Turbojet Engine
6 II
using neat sketches
Explain the cycle representation of Turbojet Engine with
7 II
afterburner using neat sketches
Explain the cycle representation of Turbofan Engine
8 II
using neat sketches
Explain the cycle representation of Turboprop Engine
9 II
using neat sketches
Briefly explain the performance of Compressor involved
10 II
in Turbojet Engine.
Briefly explain the performance of Turbine involved in
11 II
Turbojet Engine.
Briefly explain the performance of Compressor involved
12 II
in Turbofan Engine.
Briefly explain the performance of Turbine involved in
13 II
Turbofan Engine.
Briefly explain the performance of Compressor involved
14 II
in Turbojet Engine with afterburner
Briefly explain the performance of Turbine involved in
17 II
Turbojet Engine with afterburner
Explain steps involved in estimation of Bypass Ratio in
16 II
a Turbofan Engine.
Derive an expression for Momentum equation in
17 III
Turbojet Engine
Derive an expression for Thermal Efficiency, Propulsive
18 III
Efficiency and Overall Efficiency of Turbojet Engine
Define Parametric Cycle Analysis involved in Design
19 I
and Development of Turbofan Engine
Define the Ideal Cycle parameters involved in Twin
20 I
spool Turbojet Engine.

UNIT-II

MLR Institute of Technology Page 80


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

S.No Short Answer Type Blooms Taxonomy Level


1 Define Degree of Reaction? II
2 Sketch the Compressor Blade Profile and its parameters. II
3 Define symmetrical blading condition. I
4 Define axi-symmetrical blading condition. I
5 Define Compressor Stalling. I
6 Define Rotating Stall in Compressor. I
What do you mean by Suction region in Compressor
7 I
blade?
Sketch the suction region and pressure region in an axial
8 I
flow compressor.
9 Define two basic flow losses occurred in Compressors. II
10 Define Disc Friction losses II
11 Define Blade Loading and Profile Loss II
12 Define Skin Friction Losses in a Compressor Blade II
Define Clearance & Wake Losses in Axial Flow
13 II
Compressor.
14 Write a short note on Blade Stresses? II
17 What do you mean by Variable Stators? II
What do you mean by multi staging in an axial flow
16 II
compressor
17 Define Stalling? I
18 Define Stagger Angle with expression. I
19 Define incidence angle with an expression I
20 Define Surging I
S.No Long Answer Type Question Blooms Taxonomy Level
For a twin spool turbofan engine, with the fan driven by
the LP turbine and the compressor by the HP Turbine.
Separate hot and overall pressure ration 17. Fan pressure
ration 1.25 Bypass ratio 2, Turbine inlet temperature
1 III
1000K Mass flow rate of air 17kg/s. Find the sea level
static thrust and TSFC if the ambient pressure and
temperature are 0.8 bar and 288 K Heat of Reaction of
the fuel 33MJ/kg.
Air at a temperature of 17°C passes through a heat
exchanger at a velocity of 30m/s where its temperature
is raised to 800°C. If then passes through a turbine with
the same velocity of 30 m/s and expands until the
temperature fall to 650°C . On leaving the turbine the air
2 III
is taken at a velocity of 60m/s to a nozzle where it
expands until its temperature has fallen to 500°C. If the
air flow rate is 2kg/s. Find a) Rate of heat transfer from
the heat exchanger b) Power output from the turbine c)
Velocity at nozzle exit assuming no heat loss Assume

MLR Institute of Technology Page 81


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Cp=1.005kJ/kgK Sketch the cycle for the above.


Derive an expression for Velocity triangle in an axial
3 III
flow compressor.
An axial flow compressor stage has the following data
Temperature & Pressure at entry 300 K 1.0bar Degree of
Reaction 50% Mean blade ring diameter 36cm
Rotational speed 18000 rpm.Blade height at entry 6cm
Air angles at Rotor and Stator exit 25° Axial velocity
4 180m/s Work done factor 0.88 Stage efficiency 85% III
Mechanical efficiency 96.7% Calculate a) Air angles at
rotor and stator entry b) the mass flow rate of air c) the
power required to drive the compressor d) the loading
coefficient e) Pressure ration developed by the stage f)
the Mach Number at the rotor entry.
For a twin spool turbofan engine, with the fan driven by
the LP turbine and the compressor by the HP Turbine.
Separate hot and overall pressure ration 17. Fan pressure
ratio 2.17 Bypass ratio 3, Turbine inlet temperature
5 III
1100K Mass flow rate of air 22kg/s. Find the sea level
static thrust and TSFC if the ambient pressure and
temperature are 0.85 bar and 290 K Heat of Reaction of
the fuel 37MJ/kg.
Air at a temperature of 18°C passes through a heat
exchanger at a velocity of 40m/s where its temperature
is raised to 740°C. If then passes through a turbine with
the same velocity of 40 m/s and expands until the
temperature fall to 450°C . On leaving the turbine the air
6 is taken at a velocity of 70m/s to a nozzle where it III
expands until its temperature has fallen to 400°C. If the
air flow rate is 3kg/s. Find a) Rate of heat transfer from
the heat exchanger b) Power output from the turbine c)
Velocity at nozzle exit assuming no heat loss Assume
Cp=1.005kJ/kgK Sketch the cycle for the above.
An axial flow compressor stage has the following data
Temperature & Pressure at entry 330 K 1.2bar Degree of
Reaction 50% Mean blade ring diameter 36cm
Rotational speed 16500 rpm.Blade height at entry 6cm
Air angles at Rotor and Stator exit 19° Axial velocity
7 165m/s Work done factor 0.84 Stage efficiency 86% III
Mechanical efficiency 94% Calculate a) Air angles at
rotor and stator entry b) the mass flow rate of air c) the
power required to drive the compressor d) the loading
coefficient e) Pressure ration developed by the stage f)
the Mach Number at the rotor entry.
Define the working principle of Axial Flow
8 II
Compressor? Explain the distribution air angles and
MLR Institute of Technology Page 82
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

blade angles for an axial flow compressor stage.


Briefly explain the function of Impulse Turbine &
9 II
Reaction Turbine?
Explain the method of Cooling in Axial Flow Turbine
10 II
Blades using neat sketch
Explain the Degree of Reaction change in the Axial
11 II
Flow Turbine stage using T-s Diagram.
Explain the process of Multi Staging and Multi spooling
12 II
for Turbojet Engines.
13 Briefly derive an expression for Euler Turbomachine. II
Briefly explain the two dimensional flow field operated
14 II
in an axial flow compressor.
Explain the Cascade Airfoil Nomenclature and Loss
17 II
Coefficient.
Explain Stage loading and Flow coefficient in an axial
16 II
flow compressor.
Derive an expression for velocity triangle in an axial
17 III
flow turbine.
Derive expression for Stage Loading and Flow
18 III
coefficient in Axial Flow Turbine stage.
Define Degree of Reaction? Explain Degree of Reaction
19 I
for 0%, 50% & 100% reaction stages.
Sketch the Turbine Airfoil Nomenclature and Design
20 Metal Angles. Explain the necessity of Deviation angle III
in Turbine Blade Profile.

d) Is proportional to the square of the turbine inlet temperature

UNIT-III
S.No Short Answer Type Question Blooms Taxonomy Level
Define importance Choked flow in Performance
1 I
Analysis
2 Define Corrected Mass Flow rate with an expression I
Define Correction Thrust Specific Fuel Consumption
3 I
with an expression
4 Define Corrected Thrust with an expression. I
5 Define Corrected Engine speed with an expression. I
What do you mean by Corrected Speed, Referred Speed,
6 II
Non Dimensional Speed.
7 Define Flow Coefficient II
8 What do you mean by Compressor Operating Line I
9 Define Choked Nozzle Flow III
10 Define Choked Turbine? III

MLR Institute of Technology Page 83


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11 What do you mean by Correction of engine? II


Define various parameter involved In performance
12 I
analysis of an Engine
13 What do mean by Engine working lines. II
14 Give an expression for Blade Efficiency II
17 Give an expression for Stage Efficiency II
16 Define Free Vortex flow in Compressor
Sketch the surging and stalling characteristics in axial
17 II
flow turbine performance parameters
Define Profile loss characteristics occurred in Off
18 I
Design performance analysis
19 Define Tip Clearance Losses. I
Define the various non dimensional quantities involved
20 I
in performance analysis.
S.No Long Answer Type Question Blooms Taxonomy Level
Briefly explain the Compressor and Fan performance
1 III
mapping.
Derive an expression for Conservation of Mass for
2 III
Compressor Mass Flow Parameter.
Derive an expression for Turbine Characteristics
3 I
predicted during operation
Briefly explain Compressor Operating Line with an
4 II
expression.
Briefly explain the pumping characteristics of Simple
5 II
Gas Generator.
Derive an expression for Corrected Engine Performance
6 II
using Dimension Less Total Pressure.
7 Explain Engine throttle and Give an expression to it. II
Briefly classify Single Spool & Dual Spool Engine and
8 I
their performance relationships.
Derive an expression for mass flow rate in Low pressure
9 III
compressor analysis.
Derive an expression for Low By Pass ratio in Low
10 III
Pressure and High Pressure Compressor.
Derive an expression for Compressor Stages on a Low
11 III
Pressure Spool.
Briefly explain the Exhaust Nozzle Throat Area in a
12 II
Turbojet Engine.
List the various performance analysis variable for a
13 Turbo Prop Engine that are dependent and independent II
in Component Performance.
14 Briefly Explain the variable Gas Properties. II
Derive expression for Low Pressure and High Pressure
17 III
Compressor in Gas Generator Pumping Characteristics.
16 Derive an expression for High By Pass ratio in Low III
MLR Institute of Technology Page 84
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Pressure and High Pressure Compressor.


Briefly explain the two dimensional flow field operated
17 I
in an axial flow compressor.
Explain the Cascade Airfoil Nomenclature and Loss
18 I
Coefficient.
Explain Stage loading and Flow coefficient in an axial
19 I
flow compressor.
Define the working principle of Axial Flow
20 Compressor? Explain the distribution air angles and II
blade angles for an axial flow compressor stage.

UNIT-IV
S.No Short Answer Type Question Blooms Taxonomy Level
Define importance Choked flow in Performance
1 I
Analysis
2 Define Corrected Mass Flow rate with an expression I
Define Correction Thrust Specific Fuel Consumption
3 I
with an expression
4 Define Corrected Thrust with an expression. I
5 Define Corrected Engine speed with an expression. I
What do you mean by Corrected Speed, Referred Speed,
6 II
Non Dimensional Speed.
7 Define Flow Coefficient II
8 What do you mean by Compressor Operating Line I
9 Define Choked Nozzle Flow III
10 Define Choked Turbine? III
11 What do you mean by Correction of engine? II
Define various parameter involved In performance
12 I
analysis of an Engine
13 What do mean by Engine working lines. II
14 Give an expression for Blade Efficiency II
17 Give an expression for Stage Efficiency II
16 Define Free Vortex flow in Compressor
Sketch the surging and stalling characteristics in axial
17 II
flow turbine performance parameters
Define Profile loss characteristics occurred in Off
18 I
Design performance analysis
19 Define Tip Clearance Losses. I
Define the various non dimensional quantities involved
20 I
in performance analysis.
S.No Long Answer Type Question Blooms Taxonomy Level
1 Briefly explain the Compressor and Fan performance III

MLR Institute of Technology Page 85


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

mapping.
Derive an expression for Conservation of Mass for
2 III
Compressor Mass Flow Parameter.
Derive an expression for Turbine Characteristics
3 I
predicted during operation
Briefly explain Compressor Operating Line with an
4 II
expression.
Briefly explain the pumping characteristics of Simple
5 II
Gas Generator.
Derive an expression for Corrected Engine Performance
6 II
using Dimension Less Total Pressure.
7 Explain Engine throttle and Give an expression to it. II
Briefly classify Single Spool & Dual Spool Engine and
8 I
their performance relationships.
Derive an expression for mass flow rate in Low pressure
9 III
compressor analysis.
Derive an expression for Low By Pass ratio in Low
10 III
Pressure and High Pressure Compressor.
Derive an expression for Compressor Stages on a Low
11 III
Pressure Spool.
Briefly explain the Exhaust Nozzle Throat Area in a
12 II
Turbojet Engine.
List the various performance analysis variable for a
13 Turbo Prop Engine that are dependent and independent II
in Component Performance.
14 Briefly Explain the variable Gas Properties. II
Derive expression for Low Pressure and High Pressure
17 III
Compressor in Gas Generator Pumping Characteristics.
Derive an expression for High By Pass ratio in Low
16 III
Pressure and High Pressure Compressor.
Briefly explain the two dimensional flow field operated
17 I
in an axial flow compressor.
Explain the Cascade Airfoil Nomenclature and Loss
18 I
Coefficient.
Explain Stage loading and Flow coefficient in an axial
19 I
flow compressor.
Define the working principle of Axial Flow
20 Compressor? Explain the distribution air angles and II
blade angles for an axial flow compressor stage.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 86


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

UNIT-V
S.No Short Answer Type Question Blooms Taxonomy Level
Define importance Choked flow in Performance
1 I
Analysis
2 Define Corrected Mass Flow rate with an expression I
Define Correction Thrust Specific Fuel Consumption
3 I
with an expression
4 Define Corrected Thrust with an expression. I
5 Define Corrected Engine speed with an expression. I
What do you mean by Corrected Speed, Referred Speed,
6 II
Non Dimensional Speed.
7 Define Flow Coefficient II
8 What do you mean by Compressor Operating Line I
9 Define Choked Nozzle Flow III
10 Define Choked Turbine? III
11 What do you mean by Correction of engine? II
Define various parameter involved In performance
12 I
analysis of an Engine
13 What do mean by Engine working lines. II
14 Give an expression for Blade Efficiency II
17 Give an expression for Stage Efficiency II
16 Define Free Vortex flow in Compressor
Sketch the surging and stalling characteristics in axial
17 II
flow turbine performance parameters
Define Profile loss characteristics occurred in Off
18 I
Design performance analysis
19 Define Tip Clearance Losses. I
Define the various non dimensional quantities involved
20 I
in performance analysis.
S.No Long Answer Type Question Blooms Taxonomy Level
Briefly explain the Compressor and Fan performance
1 III
mapping.
Derive an expression for Conservation of Mass for
2 III
Compressor Mass Flow Parameter.
Derive an expression for Turbine Characteristics
3 I
predicted during operation
Briefly explain Compressor Operating Line with an
4 II
expression.
Briefly explain the pumping characteristics of Simple
5 II
Gas Generator.
Derive an expression for Corrected Engine Performance
6 II
using Dimension Less Total Pressure.
7 Explain Engine throttle and Give an expression to it. II
8 Briefly classify Single Spool & Dual Spool Engine and I

MLR Institute of Technology Page 87


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

their performance relationships.


Derive an expression for mass flow rate in Low pressure
9 III
compressor analysis.
Derive an expression for Low By Pass ratio in Low
10 III
Pressure and High Pressure Compressor.
Derive an expression for Compressor Stages on a Low
11 III
Pressure Spool.
Briefly explain the Exhaust Nozzle Throat Area in a
12 II
Turbojet Engine.
List the various performance analysis variable for a
13 Turbo Prop Engine that are dependent and independent II
in Component Performance.
14 Briefly Explain the variable Gas Properties. II
Derive expression for Low Pressure and High Pressure
17 III
Compressor in Gas Generator Pumping Characteristics.
Derive an expression for High By Pass ratio in Low
16 III
Pressure and High Pressure Compressor.
Briefly explain the two dimensional flow field operated
17 I
in an axial flow compressor.
Explain the Cascade Airfoil Nomenclature and Loss
18 I
Coefficient.
Explain Stage loading and Flow coefficient in an axial
19 I
flow compressor.
Define the working principle of Axial Flow
20 Compressor? Explain the distribution air angles and II
blade angles for an axial flow compressor stage.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 88


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

10. COURSE DESCRIPTION

Name of the Dept.: Aeronautical Engineering

Course Code A12113


Course Title High Speed Aerodynamics
Course Code A12113
Lectures Tutorials Practical’s Credits
Course Structure
3 1 - 3
Course Coordinator Mr. Sai Kumar A, Asst. Professor, Department of Aeronautical Engineering
Team of Instructors ----

10.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:


This course provides theoretical as well as practical basis for understanding the concepts
of aerodynamics and is compulsory for 3rd B. Tech Aeronautical Engineering branch. The main
aim of this course in the Aeronautical engineering is to guide the students to understand the
nature of the Compressible Flows.

Aerodynamics-II is concerned with study of compressible flows, particularly when it


interacts with a moving object. Understanding the motion of air (often called as flow field)
around an object enables the calculation of forces and moments acting on the object. Typical
properties calculated for a flow field include velocity, pressure, density and temperature as a
function of position and time. To understand the importance of moving objects through air,
hence the automobile, airplane, and weapon industries for engineering students. The prescribed
books and the exercises are meant to serve broadly as students handbooks

10.2. PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 3 5 1. Aerodynamics-I
2. Fluid Mechanics

MLR Institute of Technology Page 89


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

10.3 COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:

a) Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)

University
Total
Session Marks (25M) End
Marks
Exam Marks

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm


examination consists of subjective test. The subjective
test is for 20 marks, with duration of 2 hours.
Subjective test of each semester shall contain 5 one
mark compulsory questions in part-A and part-B
contains 5 questions, the student has to answer 3
questions, each carrying 5 marks. First midterm
examination shall be conducted for the first two and
half units of syllabus and second midterm examination 75 100
shall be conducted for the remaining portion.

Five marks are earmarked for assignments. There shall


be two assignments in every theory course. Marks shall
be awarded considering the average of two assignments
in each course.

b) Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing

S. No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment method (s)


Ability to Evaluate Aerodynamic
a Text Book Problems
Characteristics
b Ability to analyze the flow inside Nozzle Text Book Problems
Ability to Predict variations in flow due to
c Homework
disturbances
d Able to Analyze flow across shock waves Text Book Problems
Ability to Simplify and Evaluate hypersonic
e Class Test
flows
f An ability to design nozzle and shock tunnels Projects

MLR Institute of Technology Page 90


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

10.4 . EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks


1 I Mid 90 Min 20
2 I Assignment - 5
3 II Mid 90 Min 20
4 II Assignment - 5
5 External Examination 3 Hours 75

10.5 Course Objectives

Blooms
S. No Course Objectives Course Outcomes
Level
The student must be able to
Formulate and Predict the Ability to Evaluate
I BL6
aerodynamic characteristics of a Aerodynamic Characteristics
body in supersonic flows
The student must be able to
Ability to analyze the flow
II Evaluate flow inside Nozzle BL4
inside Nozzle
and Wind tunnels
The student will be able to
Apply perturbation theories to Ability to Predict variations in
III evaluate the changes in flow due to disturbances BL5
performance of a body due to
disturbances
The student will be able to
Able to Analyze flow across
IV Calculate Flow Variable across BL4
shock waves
shock and expansion waves
The student will be able to
Ability to Simplify and
V Apply Concept of Flow BL5
Evaluate hypersonic flows
Similarity in Hypersonic flow
The student will be able to
An ability to design nozzle
VI Design a closed flow section to BL6
and shock tunnels
develop desired flow condition
BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply

BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create

MLR Institute of Technology Page 91


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

10 .6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency Blooms


assessed by Level
Ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics,
A computing, science, and engineering to solve H Text book Analyze
Problems
Aeronautical engineering problems
Ability to design and conduct engineering
B experiments, as well as to analysis and design of H Project work Create
models.
Ability to design, Analysis and manufacture systems,
C component, or process to meet desired needs, within H Project works, Create
Assignments
realistic constraints.
D An ability to function on multi – disciplinary teams. H Projects works Analyze
An ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering
E H Class Test Evaluate
problems.
An understanding of professional, social and ethical
F N -- --
responsibility.
G An ability to communicate effectively. N -- --
The broad education necessary to understand the
H impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, N -- --
environmental, and societal context.
An ability to recognize the need for and an ability to
I S Assignments Apply
engage in life – long learning.

J An ability to gain knowledge of contemporary issues. N -- --

An ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern


K S Class test Evaluate
engineering tools necessary for engineering practice
Graduates are able to participate and succeed in
L competitive examination like GRE, GATE, TOEFL, H GATE Apply
GMAT etc.
Apply engineering and management knowledge and
M techniques to estimate time and resources needed to H Project works Analyze
complete aerospace/Mechanical engineering projects
Able to recognize the challenging and rewarding
N N -- --
careers in aerospace.
N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

MLR Institute of Technology Page 92


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

SYLLABUS

UNIT - I
ONE DIMENSIONAL FLOWS: Compressibility, Review of Fundamentals: Concepts from
Fluid Mechanics, Basic Thermodynamic Relations. Velocity of sound. Mach number, flow
regimes. Governing equations of inviscid compressible flow. Continuity, Momentum and Energy
equations in Integral and Differential form. Stagnation conditions.
UNIT - II
FLOW THROUGH NOZZLES: Flow Through a nozzle: Convergent Nozzles, CD Nozzles,
Exit Pressure variation vs Stagnation pressure variation. Chocked flow conditions. Normal
shock. Under and over expansion conditions. Flow through diffusers, wave reflections from a
free boundary. Description of supersonic wind tunnels and rocket engine. Flow with Friction,
Friction choking, Flow with heat addition, Thermal choking.
UNIT - III
OBLIQUE SHOCKS AND EXPANSION WAVES: Oblique shock relations. Supersonic,
Mach number relations strong and weak shock solutions / Shock flow over a wedge polar.
Regular reflection from a solid boundary. Intersections of shock wave. Expansion waves.
Prandtl – Meyer Expansion.
SUBSONIC COMPRESSIBLE FLOW OVER AIRFOIL: Introduction, Velocity potential
equation, Transonic small perturbation equation, Prandtl-Glauert compressibility corrections,
Critical Mach number, Drag divergence Mach number, Area rule, Supercritical airfoil.
UNIT - IV

SUPERSONIC FLOW: Linearized supersonic flow, Linearized supersonic flow over airfoil
and wings. Shock Expansion theory. Detached shock. Axi-symmetrical flows, flow past slender
bodies of revolution, conical flows, Numerical integration procedure.
HYPERSONIC FLOWS: Qualitative aspects of hypersonic flow. Newtonian theory. Flat plate
at an angle of attack. Hypersonic shock wave relations. Lift and drag of wings at hypersonic
speeds. Recent advances in hypersonic flows and testing techniques.
UNIT - V

LOW MEASUREMENTS AND MODEL TESTING: Non dimensional parameters and


numbers Similarity of flows. model testing in wind tunnel. Pressure, Velocity measurements
Force measurements, Wind tunnel balances. Scale effects and corrections, wall interferences,
induced drag and other computations/corrections. Experimental Methods, Shock Tube,
Supersonic Wind tunnel, Flow visualization, Supersonic Probes., Methods of characteristics.
Design of nozzles, External flow around bodies, Experimental characteristics of airfoils in
compressible flow.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 93


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Anderson J .D (2004), Modern Compressible Fluid Flow, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill


International Edition, New York
2. Shapiro, “Dynamic and Thermodynamics of Compressible flows”,.
RFFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Hodge B. K, Koenig K (1995), Compressible Fluid Dynamics with Computer Application,


1st edition, Prentice Hall, New York.
2. Rathakrishnan E.E. (2010), Gas Dynamics, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
3. Karsnav’ “Aerodynamics -2”
4. Clancy L. J. (2006), Aerodynamics, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi.
IX. COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning
Outcomes.

Course
Lecture Learning
No. Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference Blooms
Level
Review of Fundamentals: Compressibility, Concepts from
1. c T-2,T-2 2
Fluid Mechanics
2. c Basic Thermodynamic Relations T-2,T-2 3
3. a Thermodynamic Process and Isentropic Relations T-2,R-1 4
4. a Speed of Sound and Mach number , Flow Regimes T-2,R-1 4
Governing Equations for Inviscid Incompressible flow-
5. c T-2,R-1 4
continuity Equation
6. c Momentum Equation T-2,R-2 3
7. c Energy Equation T-2,R-2 5
8. a Stagnation conditions and Special forms of equations T-1,R-2 5
9. b Types of Nozzles (convergent and CD Nozzles) T-1,R-2 4
Exit Pressure variation vs Stagnation pressure variation,
10. b T-1,R-2 5
Choked Flow
Under and over expansion conditions. wave reflections
11. b T-1,R-2 6
from a free boundary
12. b Flow through diffusers T-1,R-2 6
13. b, f Description of supersonic wind tunnels and rocket engine T-1,R-2 4
14. b, f Flow with Friction, Friction choking T-1,R-2 5
15. b, f Flow with heat addition, Thermal choking T-1,R-2 4

MLR Institute of Technology Page 94


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Course
Lecture Learning
No. Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference Blooms
Level
16. b Problems on Flow with Friction T-1,R-2 5
17. b, f Problems on Flow with Heat addition T-1,R-2 5
18. d Shock waves and basic equations T-2,R-2 6
19. d Shock waves and basic equations T-2, R-2 6
Oblique shock relations. Supersonic, Mach number
20. d T-2, R-2 5
relations strong and weak shock solutions
21. d, a Supersonic flow over a wedge and Cones T-2, R-2 5
22. d, a Shock polar Hodograph T-1,R-2 6
23. d, a Numericals T-1,R-2 5
Regular reflection from a solid boundary. Intersections of
24. d T-1,R-2 6
shock wave
25. a, d Expansion waves. Prandtl – Meyer Expansion T-2,R-2 5
26. a, d, f Expansion theory and application(Problem) T-1,R-2 6
27. a, c Introduction to perturbation, Velocity potential Equation T-1,R-2 5
28. a, c Equation for Linearized Subsonic Flow T-1,R-2 6
29. c Prandtl Glaurent Compressibility correction T-1,R-2 4
30. a Critical Mach number, Drag divergence Mach number, T-1,R-2 4
31. a Area rule, Supercritical airfoil. T-1,R-2 4
32. a, c Equation for Linearized supersonic flow T-1,R-2 5
33. c Shock Expansion theory T-1,R-2 4
34. c Problems for flat plate T-1,R-2 5
35. a, d Detached Shock. T-1,R-3 4
Axi-symmetrical flows :Flow past slender bodies of
36. a, d T-2,R-3 5
revolution, conical flows
37. d Numerical integration procedure T-2,R-3 4
38. e Qualitative aspects of hypersonic flow- T-2,R-3 5
39. d,e Hypersonic Shock Wave Relations T-2,R-3 4
Newtonian Theory and Flat plate at an angle of attack
40. d,e T-2,R-2 5
(Lift drag)
41. d,e Problems for estimation lift and drag T-1,R-2 4
Recent advances in hypersonic flows and testing
42. e T-1,R-3 4
techniques.
43. a Similarity of flows T-1,R-2 4
44. a Non dimensional parameters and numbers T-1,R-2 4
45. d,f Model testing in wind tunnels. Pressure measurements, T-2,R-1 4
46. f Velocity measurements T-2,R-1 5
47. f Wind tunnel balances- Force measurements T-2,R-1 5

MLR Institute of Technology Page 95


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Course
Lecture Learning
No. Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference Blooms
Level
48. f Wind tunnel balances- Force measurements T-1,R-1 4
Scale effects and corrections, wall interferences, induced
49. f T-2,R-1 5
drag and other computations/corrections
50. b,f Experimental Methods, Shock Tube T-1,R-1 4
51. b, f Supersonic Wind tunnel T-1,R-1 5
52. b,f Flow visualization Methods T-2,R-2 4
53. f Supersonic Probes T-1,R-1 4
54. f,b Methods of characteristics T-1,R-2 4
55. f Design of nozzles T-1,R-1 4
External flow around bodies, Experimental characteristics
56. a T-1,R-2 4
of airfoils in compressible flow

10.7 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF


COURSE OUTCOMES:

Course Program Outcomes


Objective A B C D E F H I J K L M N
I H H H S H H H

II H H H S H S

III S S

IV H H H H S H

V H H H H

VI H H H H H H

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

10.8 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

MLR Institute of Technology Page 96


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Program Outcomes
Course
Outcomes
A B C D E F G H I J k L M N
a H H H S H H H
b H H H S H S
c S S
d H H H H S H
e H H H H
f H H H H H H

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

SESSION PLANNER

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
First day of NA
PPT/
Class -
I 1. Course Objectives -- Chalk and
Introductio
Board
n
Unit-1
By the end of this http://nptel.
Review of session the student ac.in/cours
1
Fundament will be able to Define es/1011060
als: Flow Variables 44/1
PPT/
Compressi By the end of this
I 2. Chalk and
bility, session the student
Board
Concepts will be able to
5
from Fluid Evaluate
Mechanics Compressibility of
fluid
I 3. Basic By the end of this 4 PPT/ http://nptel.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 97


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
Thermodyn session the student Chalk and ac.in/cours
amic(TD) will be able to List Board es/1011060
Relations out TD variables 44/2
affecting flow
By the end of this
session the student
will be able to Relate 4
Flow variables to TD
Variables
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
1
will be able to State es/1011060
Thermodyn
Different TD Process 44/5
amic
By the end of this PPT/
Process
I 4. session the student Chalk and
and
will be able to Board
Isentropic
Evaluate Pressure 5
Relations
and Density for
changes in
Temperature
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
1
Speed of will be able to Define es/1011060
Sound and Mach Number 44/6
PPT/
Mach By the end of this
I 5. Chalk and
number , session the student
Board
Flow will be able to
4
Regimes Differentiate Flows
based on Mach
number
Governing By the end of this http://nptel.
Equations session the student ac.in/cours
4
for Inviscid will be able to List PPT/ es/1011060
I 6. Incompress out Assumptions Chalk and 44/3
ible flow- By the end of this Board
continuity session the student 3
Equation will be able to

MLR Institute of Technology Page 98


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
Calculate Mass Flow
rate through Sections
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to List es/1011060
4
out Forces considered 44/4
PPT/
Momentum for Momentum
I 7. Chalk and
Equation Equation
Board
By the end of this
session the student
3
will be able to Derive
Momentum Equations
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
4
will be able to List es/1011060
out Energies consider PPT/ 44/4
Energy
I 8. By the end of this Chalk and
Equation
session the student Board
will be able to Apply 3
Conservation of
Energy for a flow
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to Apply 3 es/1011060
Stagnation
stagnation Condition 44/8
conditions PPT/
to solve flows
I 9. and Special Chalk and
By the end of this
forms of Board
session the student
equations
will be able to Write 1
Forms of Energy
Equation
Unit-2
Types of By the end of this http://nptel.
PPT/
Nozzles session the student ac.in/cours
II 10. 1 Chalk and
(convergen will be able to Define es/1011060
Board
t and CD Nozzle 44/29

MLR Institute of Technology Page 99


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
Nozzles) By the end of this
session the student
2
will be able to List
Types of Nozzles
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
Exit
will be able to 4 es/1011060
Pressure
Analyze the flow 44/27
variation
variation with Pe
vs. PPT/
By the end of this
II 11. Stagnation Chalk and
session the student
pressure Board
will be able to
variation,
Estimate Exit 4
Choked
Pressure Vs.
Flow
Stagnation Pressure
and Mach Number
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to es/1011060
Under and 4
Differentiate Under 44/28
over
expanded and Over
expansion
Expanded nozzle PPT/
conditions.
II 12. By the end of this Chalk and
wave
session the student Board
reflections
will be able to
from a free
Compare wave 2
boundary
reflections from a free
boundary to that of
Solid Boundary
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
1
will be able to Define es/1011060
Flow PPT/
Diffuser 40/
II 13. through Chalk and
By the end of this
diffusers Board
session the student
2
will be able to
illustrate the Need

MLR Institute of Technology Page 100


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
for a Diffuser in
Supersonic wind
tunnels
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
Description will be able to es/1121072
4
of Differentiate 16/20
supersonic between subsonic and PPT/
II 14. wind supersonic Nozzle Chalk and
tunnels and By the end of this Board
rocket session the student
engine will be able to Define 2
a Minimum Length
Nozzle
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
2
will be able to es/1011060
Flow with Explain Fanno Curve 44/36 & 37
PPT/
Friction, By the end of this
II 15. Chalk and
Friction session the student
Board
choking will be able to
4
Analyze Effect of
Friction on flow
inside duct
Explain Rayleigh http://nptel.
2
Curve ac.in/cours
Flow with
By the end of this es/1011060
heat PPT/
session the student 44/38
II 16. addition, Chalk and
will be able to
Thermal 4 Board
Analyze Effect of
choking
Heat Energy change
on flow inside duct
By the end of this http://nptel.
Problems
session the student PPT/ ac.in/cours
on Flow
II 17. will be able to 3 Chalk and es/1011060
with
Calculate Effect of Board 44/39 &40
Friction
By the end of this

MLR Institute of Technology Page 101


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
session the student
will be able to
Friction on flow
inside duct

By the end of this http://nptel.


Problems session the student ac.in/cours
PPT/
on Flow will be able to es/1011060
II 18. 3 Chalk and
with Heat Calculate Effect of 44/41
Board
addition Heat Energy change
on flow inside duct
Unit-3
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
1
will be able to Define es/1011060
Shock Wave 44/15
Shock
By the end of this PPT/
waves and
III 19. session the student Chalk and
basic
will be able to Relate Board
equations
Upstream Properties 4
to that of
Downstream of
Shock wave
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to es/1011060
2
Interpret Data from 44/16
Shock tables to solve
PPT/
waves and problems
III 20. Chalk and
basic By the end of this
Board
equations session the student
will be able to
5
Evaluate Flow
Properties across
shock wave
Oblique By the end of this PPT/ http://nptel.
III 21. 2
shock session the student Chalk and ac.in/cours

MLR Institute of Technology Page 102


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
relations. will be able to Derive Board es/1011060
Supersonic, Oblique shock 44/19
Mach Relations
number By the end of this
relations session the student
strong and will be able to
4
weak shock Differentiate
solutions between Strong and
Weak Shock wave
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to 2 es/1011060
Supersonic Compare Flow Over 44/19
PPT/
flow over a Wedge and Cone
III 22. Chalk and
wedge and By the end of this
Board
Cones session the student
will be able to 2
Explain 3D
Relieving Effect
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
1
will be able to Define es/1011060
Shock Polar 44/20
Shock By the end of this PPT/
III 23. polar session the student Chalk and
Hodograph will be able to Board
Explain the 2
Necessity of
Hodograph to solve
Flow Problems
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to 4 PPT/ es/1011060
III 24. Numericals Evaluate Properties Chalk and 44/20
across Shock Board
By the end of this
3
session the student

MLR Institute of Technology Page 103


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
will be able to
Calculate Shock
angles for given M
and Wedge angle
By the end of this http://nptel.
Regular session the student ac.in/cours
reflection will be able to Define 1 es/1011060
from a Intersection of 44/22
PPT/
solid Shocks
III 25. Chalk and
boundary. By the end of this
Board
Intersection session the student
s of shock will be able to List of 2
wave Different classes of
Shock Interactions
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to Derive 2 es/1011060
Expansion
Prandtl-Meyer 44/24
waves. PPT/
Function
III 26. Prandtl – Chalk and
By the end of this
Meyer Board
session the student
Expansion
will be able to 4
Evaluate flow over
an Expansion Corner
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to es/1011060
2
Explain the Shock 44/25
Shock
Expansion Theory
expansion PPT/
using Diamond airfoil
III 27. theory and Chalk and
By the end of this
application Board
session the student
(Problem)
will be able to Apply
4
Shock Expansion
Theory for Flat plate
to calculate Lift

MLR Institute of Technology Page 104


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
MID Exam
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
Introductio 1
will be able to Define es/1121030
n to
Perturbation PPT/ 21/28
perturbatio
III 28. By the end of this Chalk and
n, Velocity
session the student Board
potential
will be able to Derive 2
Equation
Fundamental Velocity
Potential Equation
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to Derive es/1121030
2
Equation Linearized Velocity 21/29
for Potential Eq. for PPT/
III 29. Linearized subsonic Flow Chalk and
Subsonic By the end of this Board
Flow session the student
will be able to 1
Explain Ned for
Linearization
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to State es/1121060
1
need for 56/24
Prandtl compressibility
Glaurent correction PPT/
III 30. Compressi By the end of this Chalk and
bility session the student Board
correction will be able to Apply
Compressibility 3
correction to evaluate
the actual flow
Properties
Critical By the end of this PPT/ http://nptel.
III 31. 1
Mach session the student Chalk and ac.in/cours

MLR Institute of Technology Page 105


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
number, will be able to Define Board es/1121060
Drag Drag Divergence 56/30
divergence Mach Number
Mach By the end of this
number, session the student
will be able to
Formulate an 3
expression to find the
critical Mach Number
for an Airfoil
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to State es/1121060
Area Rule and 56/30
2
Explain its
importance in Design
Area rule, of Supersonic PPT/
III 32. Supercritic Aircrafts Chalk and
al airfoil. By the end of this Board
session the student
will be able to
Differentiate 3
Between Supercritical
and Conventional
Airfoils
Unit-4
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
1
will be able to Define es/1121030
Equation Perturbation 21/29
for By the end of this PPT/
IV 33. Linearized session the student Chalk and
supersonic will be able to Derive Board
flow Fundamental 2
Equation for
Linearized
Supersonic Flow
MLR Institute of Technology Page 106
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to es/1011060
3
Calculate Lift for 44/25
Diamond Airfoil
Shock PPT/
using SE theory
IV 34. Expansion Chalk and
By the end of this
theory Board
session the student
will be able to
3
Calculate Drag for
Diamond Airfoil
using SE theory
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to es/1011060
3
Calculate Lift for 44/25
Flat plate using SE
Problems PPT/
theory
IV 35. for flat Chalk and
By the end of this
plate Board
session the student
will be able to
3
Calculate Drag for
flat plate using SE
theory
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
1
will be able to Define es/1011060
Detachment Distance 44/22
PPT/
Detached By the end of this
IV 36. Chalk and
Shock. session the student
Board
will be able to
2
Explain the Bow
Shock With Neat
Sketch
Axi- By the end of this PPT/ http://nptel.
IV 37. symmetrica session the student 4 Chalk and ac.in/cours
l flows will be able to Board es/1121060

MLR Institute of Technology Page 107


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
:Flow past predict Axi- 56/26
slender Symmetric Flows
bodies of By the end of this
revolution, session the student
conical will be able to 5
flows Evaluate conical
Flow
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to 2 es/1121060
Explain NIM for Axi 56/39
Numerical Symmetric Flows PPT/
IV 38. integration By the end of this Chalk and
procedure session the student Board
will be able to
4
Evaluate Drag Over
a cone using
singularity Methods
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to 2 es/1011050
Qualitative Illustrate 24/37
PPT/
aspects of Aerodynamic Heating
IV 39. Chalk and
hypersonic By the end of this
Board
flow- session the student
will be able to What 1
are Hypersonic Flow
Similarities
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
Hypersonic will be able to es/1011050
PPT/
Shock Deduce Relation 24/37
IV 40. 2 Chalk and
Wave Between Flow
Board
Relations Properties across
Hypersonic Shock
wave

MLR Institute of Technology Page 108


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
By the end of this
session the student
will be able to
Evaluate Max. 5
Pressure that can
occur across Shock
waves
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to Derive es/1121060
1
Newtonian Expression for Lift 56/34
Theory and for Flat plate using
PPT/
Flat plate at Newtonian theory
IV 41. Chalk and
an angle of By the end of this
Board
attack (Lift session the student
drag) will be able to Derive
2
Expression for Drag
for flat plate using
Newtonian theory
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to es/1121060
3
Calculate Lift for 56/35
Problems
Flat plate using
for PPT/
Newtonian theory
IV 42. estimation Chalk and
By the end of this
lift and Board
session the student
drag
will be able to
3
Calculate Drag for
flat plate using
Newtonian theory
Recent By the end of this http://nptel.
advances in session the student ac.in/cours
1 PPT/
hypersonic will be able to es/1011050
IV 43. Chalk and
flows and Explain Wave Riders 24/37
Board
testing By the end of this
2
techniques. session the student

MLR Institute of Technology Page 109


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
will be able to Give
Details of Space
Transportation
Unit 5
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to List es/1121060
4
out Types of 56/29
Similarities and PPT/
Similarity
V 44. explain Chalk and
of flows
By the end of this Board
session the student
will be able to 5
Evaluate Kinematic
Similarity parameters
By the end of this http://nptel.
Non session the student ac.in/cours
1
dimensiona will be able to Define es/1121060
PPT/
l Reynolds Number 56/29
V 45. Chalk and
parameters By the end of this
Board
and session the student
1
numbers will be able to Define
Mach Number
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
Model will be able to Write es/1011060
3
testing in about 3 types of 44/44
wind Pressure Measuring PPT/
V 46. tunnels. Devices Chalk and
Pressure By the end of this Board
measureme session the student
nts, will be able to 5
Evaluate Pressure
using Pitot Tube
Velocity By the end of this PPT/ http://nptel.
V 47. 2
measureme session the student Chalk and ac.in/cours

MLR Institute of Technology Page 110


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
nts will be able to List Board es/1011060
the instruments to 40/chapter
Measure Velocity %207.pdf
inside wind tunnel
By the end of this
session the student
will be able to
3
Calculate Velocity
using Pitot Static
Tube
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
Wind 1
will be able to Define es/1011060
tunnel
Load Cell PPT/ 44/46
balances-
V 48. By the end of this Chalk and
Force
session the student Board
measureme
will be able to 2
nts
Explain Working of
3 axis balance
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
Wind will be able to Draw 2 es/1011060
tunnel Schematic of 6 axis 44/45
PPT/
balances- Balance
V 49. Chalk and
Force By the end of this
Board
measureme session the student
nts will be able to 2
Explain Working of
6 axis balance
Scale By the end of this http://nptel.
effects and session the student ac.in/cours
1
corrections, will be able to Define es/1011060
PPT/
wall Scale Effect 44/46
V 50. Chalk and
interferenc By the end of this
Board
es, induced session the student
2
drag & will be able to List
Computati out the Errors in

MLR Institute of Technology Page 111


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
ons/correcti Wind Tunnel Testing
ons
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
2
will be able to Sketch es/1011060
Experiment a Shock tube 44/43
al By the end of this PPT/
V 51. Methods, session the student Chalk and
Shock will be able to Relate Board
Tube the Stagnation 4
Pressure to the Mach
Number inside Test
Section
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to Draw es/1011060
Schematic of 2 44/54
Supersonic Wind
Supersonic Tunnel and explain PPT/
V 52. Wind each Component Chalk and
tunnel By the end of this Board
session the student
will be able to
4
Differentiate
Supersonic WT and
Shock Tunnel
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
1
will be able to Define es/1011060
Flow Flow Visualization PPT/ 44/48
V 53. visualizatio By the end of this Chalk and
n Methods session the student Board
will be able to 2
Explain Shadow
Graph
Supersonic By the end of this PPT/ http://nptel.
V 54. 1
Probes session the student Chalk and ac.in/cours

MLR Institute of Technology Page 112


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
will be able to Define Board es/1011060
A Probe 44/49
By the end of this
session the student
will be able to List 3
out various probes
used in wind tunnels
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to Define 1 es/1011060
Characteristic 44/52
Methods of Curve/Line PPT/
V 55. characterist By the end of this Chalk and
ics session the student Board
will be able to
2
Discuss the Process
To design Nozzle
usng MoC
By the end of this http://nptel.
session the student ac.in/cours
will be able to List 1 es/1011060
the requirements to 44/54
design a Nozzle PPT/
Design of
V 56. By the end of this Chalk and
nozzles
session the student Board
will be able to Design
6
minimum Length
Nozzle usng MoC for
given conditions
External By the end of this http://nptel.
flow session the student ac.in/cours
around will be able to PPT/ es/1011060
V 57. bodies, Explain the 2 Chalk and 44/46
Experiment Experimental Board
al procedure for Airfoil
characterist Analysis

MLR Institute of Technology Page 113


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Lec Bloom Teaching Date Date


Unit
. Topic Session Objectives s Methodol Link Plann Conduct
No.
No Level ogy ed ed
ics of By the end of this
airfoils in session the student
compressib will be able to
le flow. Evaluate
5
aerodynamic
Characteristics of
airfoil at different
AoA

MLR Institute of Technology Page 114


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT – I ONE DIMENSIONAL FLOWS

a. Total Pressure at a point is defined as the pressure when the flow is brought to
rest [B]
b. Adiabatically
c. Isentropically
d. Isothermally
e. Isobarically

2. An aircraft is flying at M=2, where T is 250K. if the specific heat ratio of air is 1.4, the
stagnation temperature on the surface is [B]
a. 200 K
b. 450K
c. 350K
d. 1450K

3. Which one of the following is the continuity equation in differential from? (The symbols
have usual meanings) [B]
a.

b.
c. AdA +VdV+ρdρ =constant
d. AdA +VdV+ρdρ =0

4. A supersonic airplane is expected to fly at both subsonic and supersonic speeds during
its whole flight course. Which one of the following statements is TRUE? [C]
a. Airplane will experience less stability in pitch at supersonic speeds than at
subsonic speeds
b. Airplane will feel no change in pitch stability
c. Airplane will experience more stability in pitch at supersonic speeds than at
subsonic speeds
d. Pitch stability cannot be inferred from the information given

5. An ideal gas in a reservoir has a specific stagnation enthalpy of h0. The gas is
isentropically expanded to a new specific stagnation enthalpy of and velocity u. The
flow is 1D and steady. Then u2/h0 = [B]
MLR Institute of Technology Page 115
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

a. 0.85 to 0.87
b. 0.99 to 1.01
c. 0.65 to 0.7
d. 0.90 to 0.95
6. A substance experiences an entropy change of d s >0, in a quasi-steady process. The rise
in temperature is highest for the following process: [C]
a. Isenthalpic
b. Isobaric
c. Isochoric
d. Isothermal

7. In the figure below, water exists from a nozzle into atmospheric pressure of 101kPa. If
the exit velocity is V2 = 8m/s and friction is neglected, the magnitude of the axial force
on the flange at the location 1 required to keep the nozzle attached to pipe is 90-92 N.
[B]

a. 85 to 88
b. 90 to 92
c. 95 to 97
d. 88 to 90
8. Net force on a control volume due to uniform normal pressure alone [C]
a. Depends upon the shape of the control volume.
b. Translation and rotation
c. Translation and deformation
d. Deformation only
9. For a compressible fluid, sonic velocity is [B]
a. A property of the fluid
b. Always given by ( RT)1/2 where , R and T are respectively the ratio of
specific heats, gas constant and temperature in K
c. Always given by (∂p / ∂p)s1/2. Where p, ρ and s are respectively pressure,
density and entropy.
d. Always greater than the velocity of fluid at any location.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 116


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

10. If a bullet is fired in standard air at 15°C at the Mach angle of 30°, the velocity of the
bullet would be: [D]
a. 513.5 m/s
b. 585.5 m / s
c. 645.5 m / s
d. 680.5 m / s
11. The stagnation temperature of an isentropic flow of air (k = 1.4) is 400 K. If the
temperature is 200K at a section, then the Mach number of the flow will be: [C]
a. 1.046
b. 1.264
c. 2.236
d. 3.211

12. An aero plane travels at 400 km/hr at sea level where the temperature is 15°C. The
velocity of the aero plane at the same Mach number at an altitude where a temperature
of – 25°C prevailing, would be: [C]
a. 126.78 km/hr
b. 130.6 km/hr
c. 371.2 km/hr
d. 400.10 km/hr

13. An aircraft flying at an altitude where the pressure was 35 kPa and temperature -380C,
stagnation pressure measured was 65.4 kPa. Calculate the speed of the aircraft. Take
molecular weight of air as 28 is 349m/s [A]
a. 349 m/s
b. 380 m/s
c. 320 m/s
d. 310 m/s
14. What is the critical pressure ratio for isentropic nozzle flow with ratio of specific heats
as 1.5? [A]
3
a. ( 0.8)
b. ( 0.8)0.6
c. (1 .25)0.33
d. ( 1.25) 3
In a normal shock wave in one-dimensional flow [A]

e. Pressure, density and temperature increase


f.Velocity, temperature and density increase
g. Pressure, density and temperature decrease
h. Velocity, pressure and density decrease

MLR Institute of Technology Page 117


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

15. In a normal shock in a gas, the: [A]


a. Upstream shock is supersonic
b. Upstream flow is subsonic
c. Downstream flow is sonic
d. Both downstream flow and upstream flow are supersonic.
16. If the upstream Mach number of a normal shock occurring in air (k = 1.4) is 1.68, then
the Mach number after the shock is: [B]
a. 0.84
b. 0.646
c. 0.336
d. 0.546
17. In a normal shock in a gas: [C]
a. The stagnation pressure remains the same on both sides of the shock
b. The stagnation density remains the same on both sides of the shock.
c. The stagnation temperature remains the same on both sides of the shock
d. The Mach number remains the same on both sides of the shock.
A normal shock: [B]

a. Causes a disruption and reversal of flow pattern


b. May occur only in a diverging passage
c. Is more severe than an oblique shock
d. Moves with a velocity equal to the sonic velocity
18. The fluid property that remains unchanged across a normal shock wave is: [A]
a. Stagnation enthalpy
b. Stagnation pressure.
c. Static pressure.
d. Mass density

UNIT – II FLOW THROUGH NOZZLES

1. Across a normal shock [D]


a. Both total temperature and total pressure decrease
b. Both total temperature and total pressure remain constant
c. Total pressure remains constant but total temperature decrease
d. Total temperature remains constant and total pressure decrease

2. The diffuser of an airplane engine decelerates the airflow from M=0.85 to compressor
inlet Mach number 0.38. Assume that the ratio of specific heats is constant 1.4. If the
MLR Institute of Technology Page 118
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

diffuser pressure recovery ratio is 0.92, then the isentropic efficiency of the diffuser is
[B]
a. 0.631
b. 0.814
c. 0.892
d. 1.343
3. In a convergent divergent nozzle of a rocket motor, the wall heat flux is maximum at
[B]
a. The exit of the divergent portion of nozzle
b. The entry to the convergent portion of nozzle
c. Throat of the nozzle
d. The mid length of the divergent portion of the nozzle
4. Which of the following statements are true for the flow across a stationary normal shock
wave [A]
i. Stagnation temperature stays constant
ii. Stagnation pressure decreases
iii. Entropy increases
iv. Stagnation pressure increases
v. Stagnation temperature increases
a. i, ii, iii
b. ii, iii, iv
c. iii, iv, v
d. i, iv, v
5. A piston compresses 1 kg of air inside a cylinder as shown. The rate at which the piston
does work on the air is 3000W. At the same time, heat is being lost through the walls of
the cylinder at a rate of 847.5 W. After 10 seconds, the change in specific energy of the
air is [A]
a. 21525 J/kg
b. -21525 J/kg
c. 30000J/kg
d. -8475 J/kg
6. A piston compresses 1 kg of air inside a cylinder as shown. The rate at which the piston
does work on the air is 3000W. At the same time, heat is being lost through the walls of
the cylinder at a rate of 847.5 W. If the specific heats are constant. then find the
temperature [C]
a. 21.4 K
b. -21.4 K
c. 30 K
d. -30 K

MLR Institute of Technology Page 119


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

7. The stagnation pressure and stagnation temperature inside combustion chamber of a


liquid propellant rocket engine are 1.5 MPa and 2500 K resp. the burned gases have
=1.2 and R=692.83J/kgK. The rocket has a converging diverging nozzle with a throat
area of 0.025 m2 and the flow rate at the exit of the nozzle is supersonic. If the flow
through nozzle is isentropic. What is the mass flow rate of the gases out of the nozzle?
[A]
a. 18.5 kg/s
b. 31.2 kg/s
c. 29.7 kg/s
d. 19.4 kg/s
8. Consider 1D adiabatic, inviscid, compressible flow of air through a duct of cross
sectional area(A)=1 m2. If the volumetric flow rate is Q=680m3/s and stagnation
temperature (T0) = 580.05K, then the air temperature inside the duct is [B]
a. 300 K
b. 350 K
c. 400 K
d. 450 K
9. The ideal static pressure coefficient of a diffuser with an area ratio of 2.0 is [marks to
all]
a. 0.25
b. 0.50
c. 0.75
d. 1.0
10. Consider one-dimensional isentropic flow at a Mach number of 0.5. If the area of cross-
section of stream tube increases by 3% somewhere along the flow, the corresponding
percentage change in density is ___one_____ [C]
a. 0.5
b. 0.9
c. 1
d. 1.2

11. A student needs to find velocity across a stationary normal shock. He measures density
and pressure across the shock as shown in the figure below. 1bar = 105Pa. (No shock
table is needed for the calculations). The value of u1 in m/s is _1705-1720_. [B]

P1= 01 bar, Density= 1.2


P2= 29 bar, Density= 6
a. 1650 -1665
b. 1705-1720
c. 1740-1750
d. 1760-1780

MLR Institute of Technology Page 120


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

12. A rocket nozzle is designed to produce maximum thrust at an altitude, 𝐻𝐻 = 8 𝑘m from


the sea level. The nozzle operates in [A]
a. Under-expanded condition for 𝐻𝐻 > 8 𝑘m
b. Under-expanded condition for 𝐻𝐻 < 8 𝑘m
c. Sonic exit condition for 𝐻𝐻> 8 𝑘m
d. Unchoked condition for 𝐻𝐻<8 km

13. For a normal shock, the relation between the upstream Mach number (M1) and the
downstream Mach number (M2) is given by. For an ideal gas with, the asymptotic value
of the downstream Mach number is ____0.37-0.39___. [C]
a. 0.4-0.5
b. 0.3-0.35
c. 0.37-0.39
d. 0.45-0.50
14. For a completely subsonic isentropic flow through a convergent nozzle, which of the
following statement is TRUE? [C]
(A) Pressure at the nozzle exit > back pressure.
(B) Pressure at the nozzle exit < back pressure.
(C) Pressure at the nozzle exit = back pressure.
(D) Pressure at the nozzle exit = total pressure

15. Consider 1-D, steady, inviscid, compressible flow through a convergent nozzle. The
total temperature and total pressure is Po, To respectively. The flow through the nozzle
is choked with a mass flow rate of m. If the total temperature is increased to 4 T 0, with
total pressure remaining unchanged, then the mass flow rate through the nozzle
a. Remains unchanged. [B]
b. becomes half of m
c. becomes twice of m
d. becomes four times of m

16. A De Laval Nozzle is to be designed for as exit Mach number of 1.5. The reservoir
conditions are given as Po= 1atm, To = 200C, =1.4. Assuming shock free flow in the
nozzle, the exit absolute pressure is 0.54 - 0.56 . [C]
a. 0.35-0.45
b. 0.54-0.56
c. 0.6-0.75
d. 0.75-0.80
17. Consider the following statements: [A]
In the case of convergent nozzle for compressible flow,

1. No shock wave can occur at any pressure ratio.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 121


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2. No expansion wave can occur below a certain pressure ratio.


3. Expansion wave can occur below a certain pressure ratio
4. Shock wave can occur above a certain pressure ratio.
Which of the following statements given above are correct ?

a. 1 and 2
b. 3 and 4
c. 1 and 3
d. 2 and 4

18. Fanno line low is a flow in a constant area duct: [C]


a. With friction and heat transfer but in the absence of work.
b. With friction and heat transfer and accompanied by work
c. With friction but in the absence of heat transfer or work.
d. Without friction but accompanied by heat transfer and work

19. Which one of the following statements is correct about the Fanno flow? [C]
a. For an initially subsonic flow, the effect of friction is to decrease the Mach
number towards unity
b. For an initially supersonic flow, the effect of friction is to increase the Mach
number towards unity
c. At the point of maximum entropy, the Mach number is unity
d. Stagnation pressure always increases along the Fanno line

20. Rayleigh line flow is a flow in a constant area duct: [B]


a. With friction but without heat transfer
b. Without friction but with heat transfer
c. With both friction and heat transfer
d. Without either friction or heat transfer
UNIT – III OBLIQUE SHOCKS AND EXPANSION WAVES & SUBSONIC
COMPRESSIBLE FLOW OVER AIRFOIL

1. The drag divergence Mach Number of airfoil [B]


a. Is fixed number for given airfoil
b. Is always higher than Critical Mach Number
c. Is equal to critical Mach Number at Zero Angle of Attack
d. Is the Mach Number at which a shock wave first appears on airfoil

MLR Institute of Technology Page 122


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2. One of the criteria for the high speed airplanes is that critical Mach number should be as
high as possible. Therefore, high speed subsonic airplanes are usually designed with
[B]
a. Thick airfoils
b. Thin airfoils
c. Laminar flow Airfoils
d. Diamond airfoils

3. The aerospace system shown in following figure is designed in such a way that the
expansion generated at A is completely absorbed by wall B for P 1=Pd, where Pd
corresponds to the design condition. [C]

For P1>P∞ which of the following is NOT True?

a. For P1<Pd, the expansion fan from A gets reflected from B as a compression
wave
b. For P1>Pd, the expansion fan from A gets reflected from B as an expansion wave
c. For P1<Pd, the expansion fan from A gets reflected from B as a compression
wave
d. For P1>Pd, B always sees as expansion

4. An irrotational and inviscid flow can become rotational on Passing through a [B]
a. Normal shock wave
b. Curved shock wave
c. Oblique shock wave
d. Mach wave
5. For a free stream mach number of 0.7 the critical pressure coefficient is -0.78. If the
minimum pressure coefficient for a given airfoil in incompressible flow is -0.6, then the
flow over the airfoil at free stream mach number 0.7 is [D]
a. Subsonic
b. Completely Supersonic
c. Incompressible
d. Partly subsonic and partly supersonic

MLR Institute of Technology Page 123


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

6. Consider a 2D body in supersonic flow with an attached shock, An increase in free


stream Mach number will cause the oblique shock wave to [A]
a. Move closer to body
b. Move away from body
c. Detached from the body
d. Become normal shock

7. For flow through Prandtl Meyer Expansion wave [B]


a. Mach Number stays constant
b. Entropy stays constant
c. Temperature stays constant
d. Density stays constant

8. For flow across an oblique shock which of the following statements is true [D]
a. Component of velocity normal to shock decreases while tangential component
increases
b. Component of velocity normal to shock increases while tangential component
decreases
c. Component of velocity normal to shock unchanged while tangential
component decreases
d. Component of velocity normal to shock decreases while tangential
component unchanged

9. Consider the inviscid, adiabatic flow of air at free stream conditions, M1 = 2, P1 = 1 atm
and T1 = 288 K around a sharp expansion corner (θ = 20°) as shown below. The
Prandtl-Meyer function, ν, is given as a function of Mach number. Assume air to be
calorically perfect with = 1.4. The Mach number, M2, downstream of the expansion
corner is approximately [C]
a. 2.00
b. 1.76
c. 2.83
d. 3.14

10. Consider an inviscid, adiabatic flow of air at free stream Mach, M∞ = 2, across a
compression corner (θ = 20°). The free stream total enthalpy is h0∞ = 810 kJ/ kg.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 124


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Assume that air is calorically perfect with = 1.4, R = 287 J/ kg K. The shock angle is
[D]
a. = 20°
b. > 20° and < 30°
c. = 30°
d. > 30°

11. Consider an inviscid, adiabatic flow of air at free stream Mach Number, M∞ = 2, across
a compression corner (θ = 20°) as shown. The free stream total enthalpy is h0∞ = 810
kJ kg-1. Assume that air is calorically perfect with = 1.4, R = 287 J kg-1 K-1. The total
temperature at point P is [A]
a. 806.37 K
b. 1128.92 K
c. 1612.74 K
d. 2257.84 K
12. The critical Mach number of an airfoil is attained when [C]
a. The free stream Mach number is sonic.
b. The free stream Mach number is supersonic.
c. The Mach number somewhere on the airfoil is unity.
d. The Mach number everywhere on the airfoil is supersonic.
13. The Mach angle for a flow at Mach 2.0 is [A]
o o o o
(A) 30 (B) 45 (C) 60 (D) 90

14. An oblique shock wave with a wave angle β is generated from a wedge angle of θ. The
ratio of the Mach number downstream of the shock to its normal component is [A]
(A) Sin(β–θ)
(B) Cos(β–θ)
(C) Sin(θ–β)
(D) Cos(θ–β)

15. Which one of the following statements is NOT TRUE for a supersonic flow? [B]
a. Over a gradual expansion, entropy remains constant
b. Over a sharp expansion corner, entropy can increase
c. Over a gradual compression, entropy can remain constant
d. Over a sharp compression corner, entropy increases

16. Consider a supersonic stream at a Mach number M=2, undergoing a gradual expansion.
The stream is turned by an angle of 3 degrees due to the expansion. The Mach number
downstream of the expansion is [C]
a. 1.88
b. 2.00

MLR Institute of Technology Page 125


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

c. 2.11
d. 2.33

17. Consider supersonic flow near a corner (at an angle θ from the horizontal) with an
attached oblique shock (at an angle with horizontal) as shown in figure. If Mach
number M decreases gradually from a high supersonic value, which of the following
statements is correct? [B]
a. will decrease if the shock is a weak shock
b. will decrease if the shock is a strong shock
c. will increase for both weak and strong shocks
d. remains unchanged for both weak and strong shocks

18. With increase in airfoil thickness, the critical Mach number for an airfoil is likely to
[A]

a. Decrease.
b. Increase.
c. Remain Unchanged.
d. Be Undefined

19. Which of the following statement is NOT TRUE across an oblique shock wave?
[D]
a. Static temperature increases, total temperature remains constant.
b. Static pressure increases, static temperature increases.
c. Static temperature increases, total pressure decreases.
d. Static pressure increases, total temperature decreases.

20. A trace from the Schlieren photograph of the flow around a corner reveals the edges of
the expansion fan as shown below. The leading and trailing edges of the expansion fan
make the angles as shown. Assuming =1.4, the angle of the expansion fan is 48-49
(in two decimal places) [B]

MLR Institute of Technology Page 126


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

a. 45-46
b. 48-49
c. 50-51
d. 52-53

UNIT – IV SUPERSONIC FLOW & HYPERSONIC FLOWS


1. The aerodynamic centre of a supersonic aerofoil, with chord c, is located at [C]
a. the leading edge
b. 0.25c
c. 0.5c
d. 0.75c
2. Consider a thin flat plate airfoil at a small angle α to an oncoming supersonic stream of
air. Assuming the flow to be inviscid Cd/Cl2 is [B]
a. Zero
b. Independent of α
c. Proportional to α
d. Proportional to α2
3. The critical Mach number for a flat plate of zero thickness, at zero angle of attack, is
___one______ [A]
a. 1
b. 1.1
c. 0.8
d. 0.9
4. For inviscid, supersonic flow over a diamond shaped airfoil of angle 5 0 and incidence
angle 100, shown in the figure, which statement is correct among the following? [D]
a. The airfoil will experience zero lift and positive drag force
b. The airfoil will experience positive lift and zero drag force
c. The airfoil will experience negative lift and zero drag force
d. The airfoil will experience positive lift and positive drag force

MLR Institute of Technology Page 127


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

5. In adiabatic flow with friction, the stagnation temperature along a streamline [C]
a. Increases
b. Decreases
c. Remains Constant
d. Varies with time

6. Which of the following assumptions are true in the case of Rayleigh flow? [B]
1. Perfect gas
2. Constant area duct.
3. Steady one-dimensional real flow.
4. Heat transfer during the flow.
Select the correct answer using the code given below:

a. 1, 2 and 3
b. 2, 3 and 4
c. 1, 3 and 4
d. 1, 2 and 4

7. Air at 2 bar and 60°C enters a constant area pipe of 60 mm diameter with a velocity of
40 m/s. During the flow through the pipe, heat is added to the air stream. Frictional
effects are negligible and the values of Cp and Cv are that of standard air. The Mach
number of the flow corresponding to the maximum entropy will be: [B]
a. 0.845
b. 1
c. 0.1212
d. 1.183

8. For flow across an oblique shock which of the following statements is true [D]
a. Component of velocity normal to shock decreases while tangential component
increases
b. Component of velocity normal to shock increases while tangential component
decreases
c. Component of velocity normal to shock unchanged while tangential
component decreases
d. Component of velocity normal to shock decreases while tangential
component unchanged

9. Consider the inviscid, adiabatic flow of air at free stream conditions, M1 = 2, P1 = 1 atm
and T1 = 288 K around a expansion corner (θ = 20°). The Prandtl-Meyer function, ν, is
given as a function of Mach number. Assume air to be calorically perfect with = 1.4.
The Mach number M2, downstream of the expansion corner is approximately [C]
MLR Institute of Technology Page 128
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

a. 2.00
b. 1.76
c. 2.83
d. 3.14
10. An aircraft is flying at Mach 3.0 at an altitude where the ambient pressure and
temperature are 50 kPa and 200 K respectively. If the converging-diverging diffuser of
the engine (considered isentropic with ratio of specific heats, = 1.4 and specific gas
constant R = 287 J/kgK) has a throat area of 0.05 m2, the mass flow rate through the
engine in kg/s is
[D]

a. 197
b. 232
c. 790
d. 157
11. The Pitot tube of an aircraft registers a pressure P0= 54051N/m2. The static pressure,
density and the ratio of specific heats of the free stream are P1= 45565 N/m2. Density
ρ=0. 6417kg/m3and 𝛾=1.4, respectively. The indicated airspeed (in m/s) is [D]
a. 6.157
b. 6.162
c. 0.172
d. 3

12. The convergent nozzle, leading to the test section of a low speed subsonic wind tunnel,
has a contraction ratio of 10:1. The pressure difference across the nozzle is maintained
at 1000 N/m2 and the density of air is 1.23 kg/m3. Assuming one-dimensional, steady,
inviscid flow, the velocity in the test section as measured at point B is _40-41_
m/s.[Ans: 40-41]
13. Consider a supersonic stream at a Mach number M=2, undergoing a gradual
expansion. The stream is turned by an angle of 3 degrees due to the expansion. The
Mach number downstream of the expansion is [B]
a. 1.88
b. 2.00
c. 2.11
d. 2.33
14. Consider supersonic flow near a corner (at an angle θfrom the horizontal) with an
attached oblique shock (at an angle with horizontal) as shown in figure. If Mach
number M decreases gradually from a high supersonic value, which of the following
statements is correct? [B]
a. will decrease if the shock is a weak shock
b. will decrease if the shock is a strong shock
c. will increase for both weak and strong shocks
d. remains unchanged for both weak and strong shocks

MLR Institute of Technology Page 129


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

15. With increase in airfoil thickness, the critical Mach number for an airfoil is likely to
[A]

a. Decrease.
b. Increase.
c. Remain Unchanged.
d. Be Undefined

16. For a normal shock, the relation between the upstream Mach number (M1) and the
downstream Mach number (M2) is given by. For an ideal gas with, the asymptotic value
of the downstream Mach number is ____0.37-0.39___. [Ans: 0.37-0.39]

17. For a completely subsonic isentropic flow through a convergent nozzle, which of the
following statement is TRUE? [C]
(A) Pressure at the nozzle exit > back pressure.
(B) Pressure at the nozzle exit < back pressure.
(C) Pressure at the nozzle exit = back pressure.
(D) Pressure at the nozzle exit = total pressure

18. Consider 1-D, steady, inviscid, compressible flow through a convergent nozzle. The
total temperature and total pressure is Po, To respectively. The flow through the nozzle
is choked with a mass flow rate of m. If the total temperature is increased to 4 T 0, with
total pressure remaining unchanged, then the mass flow rate through the nozzle [B]
a. Remains unchanged.
b. becomes half of m
c. becomes twice of m
d. becomes four times of m
19. A De Laval Nozzle is to be designed for as exit Mach number of 1.5. The reservoir
conditions are given as Po= 1atm, To = 200C, =1.4. Assuming shock free flow in the
nozzle, the exit absolute pressure is 0.54 - 0.56 .
20. An aero plane travels at 400 km/hr at sea level where the temperature is 15°C. The
velocity of the aero plane at the same Mach number at an altitude where a temperature
of – 25°C prevailing, would be: [C]
a. 126.78 km/hr
b. 130.6 km/hr
c. 371.2 km/hr
d. 400.10 km/hr

MLR Institute of Technology Page 130


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

UNIT – V FLOW MEASUREMENTS AND MODEL TESTING

1. In a supersonic wind tunnel design an oblique shock diffuser is proffered over a


normal shock diffuser because [A]
a. It reduces total pressure loss
b. The flow is slowed down more rapidly
c. Flow is accelerated more rapidly
d. It increases total pressure loss

2. A low speed wind tunnel has a contraction ratio of 14:1 and the cross-sectional area
of the test section is 1 m2. The static pressure difference between the settling
chamber and the test section is 40 cm of water column. Assume g = 9.81m/s,
density of Water 1000kg/m3,, Density of Air 1.225 kg/m3 speed of air in the test
section (in m/s) is _80-82_ [Gate 2011]

3. The shadowgraph flow visualization technique depends on [C]


a. The variation of the value of density in the flow.
b. The first derivative of density with respect to spatial coordinate.
c. The second derivative of density with respect to spatial coordinate.
d. The third derivative of density with respect to spatial coordinate.
4. In a closed-circuit supersonic wind tunnel, the convergent-divergent (C-D) nozzle and
test section are followed by a C-D diffuser to swallow the starting shock. Here, we
should have the [B]
a. Diffuser throat larger than the nozzle throat and the shock located just at the
diffuser throat.
b. Diffuser throat larger than the nozzle throat and the shock located
downstream of the diffuser throat.
c. Diffuser throat of the same size as the nozzle throat and the shock located just at
the diffuser throat.
d. Diffuser throat of the same size as the nozzle throat and the shock located
downstream of the diffuser throat.

5. A student can measure free-stream velocity of a low-speed wind tunnel using a


i. Pitot tube alone aligned with the flow direction.
ii. Pitot tube aligned with the flow direction with static pressure measurement at an
appropriate position on the tunnel wall.
iii. Pitot tube aligned with the flow direction along with barometer pressure reading of
the outside ambient.
iv. Pitot static tube alone aligned with the flow direction.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 131


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Considering the above statements, which of the following options is correct? [C]

a. only
b. & (ii)
c. & (iv)
b. (i), (iii) & (iv)
6. An aircraft is flying at Mach 3.0 at an altitude where the ambient pressure and
temperature are 50 kPa and 200 K respectively. If the converging-diverging diffuser of
the engine (considered = 1.4 and specific gas constant R = 287 J/kgK) has a throat
area of 0.05 m2, the mass flow rate through the engine in kg/s is [D]
a. 197
b. 232
c. 790
d. 157
7. The Pitot tube of an aircraft registers a pressure P0= 54051N/m2. The static pressure,
density and the ratio of specific heats of the free stream are P1= 45565 N/m2. Density
ρ=0. 6417kg/m3and 𝛾=1.4, respectively. The indicated airspeed (in m/s) is [B]
a. 6.157
b. 6.162
c. 0.172
d. 3
8. The convergent nozzle, leading to the test section of a low speed subsonic wind tunnel,
has a contraction ratio of 10:1. The pressure difference across the nozzle is maintained
at 1000 N/m2 and the density of air is 1.23 kg/m3. Assuming one-dimensional, steady,
inviscid flow, the velocity in the test section as measured at point B is _______ m/s.
[Ans: 40-41]
9. While measuring the velocity of air (( = 1.2 kg/m3), the difference in the stagnation and
static pressures of a Pitot-static tube was found to be 380 Pa. The velocity at that
location in m/s is: [D]
a. 24.03
b. 4.02
c. 17.8
d. 25.17

10. A compressible fluid flows through a passage as shown in the above diagram. The
velocity of the fluid at the point A is 400 m/s. Which one of the following is correct?
At the point B, the fluid experiences [A]

a. An increase in velocity and decrease in pressure

MLR Institute of Technology Page 132


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

b. A decrease in velocity and increase in pressure


c. A decrease in velocity and pressure
d. An increase in velocity and pressure.
11. A rocket engine is tested on a test bed under the ideal condition of fully expanded jet.
The exhaust velocity is 2 km/s through a nozzle of area 2.5 m2. The mass flow rate is
200 kg/s. The specific impulse of the propellant and the thrust developed respectively
are (assume g = 9.81 m/s2) [B]
a. 175.87 s and 200 kN
b. 203.87 s and 400 kN
c. 231.87 s and 200 kN
d. 280.87 s and 400 kN
12. In a steady flow through a nozzle, the flow velocity on the nozzle axis is given by v =
u0(1 + 3x/L), where x is the distance along the axis of the nozzle from its inlet plane
and L is the length of the nozzle. The time required for a fluid particle on the axis to
travel from the inlet to the exit plane of the nozzle is
[B]
a. (L/u0
b. (L/3u0)ln(4)
c. L/4u0
d. L/2.5u0
13. Across a normal shock wave in a converging-diverging nozzle for adiabatic flow, which
of the following relations are valid? [D]
a. Continuity and energy equations, equation of state, isentropic relation
b. Energy and momentum equations, equation of state, isentropic relation
c. Continuity, energy and momentum equations, equation of state
d. Equation of state, isentropic relation, momentum equation, mass-
conservation Principle
14. Isentropic efficiency of a subsonic diffuser is defined as [A]
a.

b.

c.

d.
15. For a completely subsonic isentropic flow through a convergent nozzle, which of the
following statement is TRUE? ` [C]
(A) Pressure at the nozzle exit > back pressure.
(B) Pressure at the nozzle exit < back pressure.
(C) Pressure at the nozzle exit = back pressure.
(D) Pressure at the nozzle exit = total pressure

MLR Institute of Technology Page 133


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

16. Consider 1-D, steady, inviscid, compressible flow through a convergent nozzle. The
total temperature and total pressure is Po, To respectively. The flow through the nozzle
is choked with a mass flow rate of m. If the total temperature is increased to 4 T 0, with
total pressure remaining unchanged, then the mass flow rate through the nozzle [B]
a. Remains unchanged.
b. becomes half of m
c. becomes twice of m
d. becomes four times of m
17. A De Laval Nozzle is to be designed for as exit Mach number of 1.5. The reservoir
conditions are given as Po= 1atm, To = 200C, =1.4. Assuming shock free flow in the
nozzle, the exit absolute pressure is 0.54 - 0.56 .

18. Consider a steady 1D flow of a prefect gas with heat addition in a duct. The T-s Curve
shows both static and stagnation conditions at two locations, A and B in the duct. At
and Bt denote stagnation conditions for states A and B respectively. It is known that
(ΔT)A = (ΔT)B . MA and MB are Mach numbers of the flow at locations A and B
[B]

Which of the following is true about the flow?


a. Flow is subsonic and MA < MB
b. Flow is Supersonic and MA > MB
c. Flow is subsonic and MA > MB
d. Flow is Supersonic and MA < MB

19. A strong normal shock wave with a pressure ratio of 29 across it, is travelling in
stationary air at 280K in a straight duct. The magnitude of the velocity of the air
induced behind the shock wave is 1341 to 1343 m/s.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 134


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

20. If the cross-section of a nozzle is increasing in the direction of flow in supersonic


flow, then in the downstream direction. [D]
a. Both pressure and velocity will increase.
b. Both pressure and velocity will decrease.
c. Pressure will increase but velocity will decrease.
d. Pressure will decrease but velocity will increase.

TUTORIAL QUESTIONS

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-I Short Answer Questions


Define Mach Number in terms of Bulk Modulus of
1 Remember a
Elasticity
2 Define Stagnation Condition Remember a
3 Distinguish between static and Stagnation Pressure Understand b
Relate Stagnation and Static Pressure in terms of Mach
4 Understand d
Number for Isentropic Flow of Air
Give Expression for ratio of Static to Stagnation
5 Understand d
Temperature (T/T0) for Isentropic Flow of Air
6 What are the Different regions of compressible flows Remember e
Calculate the sonic Velocity of oxygen when it is at
7 Apply e
1100C and =1.4 and Molecular Weight =32
A plane is travelling at a velocity of 1600kmph, where
8 pressure and Temperature are 40kPa and 350C. Apply a
Evaluate Mach Angle and Mach Number
Static Temperature and Velocity are 3000C and 200m/s.
9 Apply a
Calculate Max Velocity.
Aircraft is flying at 1000kmph. Evaluate Mach
10 Number and Speed of Sound at Sea Level and at 11000 Apply d
m Altitude

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

MLR Institute of Technology Page 135


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

UNIT-I
Long Answer Questions
Air is allowed to expand from an initial state A (where
PA = 2.068 x 105 N/m2 and TA = 333K) to state B
(where PB = 1.034 x 105 N/m2 and TB = 305 K).
1 Calculate the change in the specific entropy of the air, Apply f
and show that the change in entropy is the same for an
isobaric process from A to some intermediate state C
followed by an iso volumetric change from C to B
A ramjet flies at 11 km altitude with a flight mach
number of 0.9. In the inlet diffuser, the air is brought to
the stagnation condition so that it is stationary just
before the combustion chamber. Combustion takes
2 Apply d
place at constant pressure and a temperature increase of
15000C results. The combustion products are then
ejected through the nozzle. Calculate the stagnation
pressure and temperature.
For an aircraft flying at a speed of 700kmph, find the
3 variation of speed of sound a, and Mach number M, Analyze d
with sea level and 8km altitude.
For an aircraft flying at a speed of 1000kmph, find the
4 variation of speed of sound a, and Mach number M, Analyze f
with sea level and 11km altitude.
During a flight, a fighter aircraft attains its cruise speed
of 600 m/s at 10km altitude after taking off at 150 m/s
5 from sea level. Assuming the speed to have increased Evaluate f
linearly with altitude during the climb, Compute the
Mach number variation with altitude.
A fighter aircraft attains its maximum speed of 2160
kmph at an altitude of 12 km. The take-off speed at sea
level is 270 kmph. If the flight speed increases linearly
6 Evaluate d
with altitude, Compute the variation of stagnation
temperature awith altitude for a climb up to the
maximum speed.
Air is allowed to expand from an initial state A (where
PA = 2.068 x 105 N/m2 and TA = 333K) to state B
(where PB = 1.034 x 105 N/m2 and TB = 305 K).
7 Calculate the change in the specific entropy of the air, Apply a
and show that the change in entropy is the same for an
isothermal change from A to some intermediate state D
followed by an isentropic change from D to B

MLR Institute of Technology Page 136


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Air flows through a duct. The pressure and temperature


at station 1 are P1 = 0.7 atm and T1 = 300C,
8 respectively. At a second station, the pressure is 0.5 Apply a
atm. Calculate the temperature and density at the
second station. Assume the flow to be isentropic
For an aircraft flying at a speed of 1000kmph, find the
9 variation of speed of sound a, and Mach number M, Analyze d
with sea level and 11km altitude.
A ramjet flies at 11 km altitude with a flight mach
number of 0.9. In the inlet diffuser, the air is brought to
the stagnation condition so that it is stationary just
before the combustion chamber. Combustion takes
10 place at constant pressure and a temperature increase of Analyze f
15000C results. The combustion products are then
ejected through the nozzle. What will be the nozzle
exit velocity? (At inlet P = 0.3 atm and T = 213 K,
at exit Pexit = 0.3 atm).

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-IIShort Answer Questions


1 What is meant by Isentropic flow with variable area Remember a
2 Write the Equation for Efficiency of Diffuser Understand b
3 What is Choked Flow Remember b
State Necessary conditions for Choked flow to occur in
4 Understand d
a nozzle
5 Give Expression for Nozzle Efficiency Understand d
6 Differentiate between Nozzle and Venturi a
A Diffuser Has Exit To Throat Area Ratio Of 1.5. The
Inlet Mach, Pressure and Temperature are 0.8,1
7 Bar150C. Assuming Flow To Be Isentropic. Calculate Apply a
Exit Pressure, Exit Temperature and Exit Mach
Number
8 Define Fanno Flow Remember a
9 Define Fanno Line and explain Its Significance Remember b
10 Explain Choking in Fanno Flow Understand b

MLR Institute of Technology Page 137


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-II Long Answer Questions


A storage chamber of a compressor is maintained at 1.8
atms absolute and 200C. The surrounding ambient
1 Apply a
pressure is 1 atm. Calculate the mass flow rate per unit
area. Assume air as a perfect gas.
A storage chamber of a compressor is maintained at 1.8
atm absolute and 200C. The surrounding ambient
2 pressure is 1 atm. Calculate the velocity with which Apply b
airflow will take place from the chamber to the outside
through a unit area hole
A De Laval Nozzle has to be designed for an exit Mach
number of 1.5 with exit diameter of 200mm. Find the
ratio of throat area to exit area necessary. The reservoir
3 Analyze c
conditions are given as P0 = 1 atm; T0 = 200C. Find the
maximum mass flow rate through the nozzle. What will
be the exit pressure and temperature?
A De Laval Nozzle has to be designed for an exit Mach
number of 1.5 with exit diameter of 200mm. The
4 Analyze c
reservoir conditions are given as P0 = 1 atm; T0 = 200C.
Find the maximum mass flow rate through the nozzle.
A combustion chamber in a gas turbine plant receives
air at 350 K, 0.55 bar and 75 m/s. The air fuel ratio is
5 30 and the calorific value of the fuel is 42 MJ/Kg. Evaluate c
Taking lambda= 1.4 and R = 287 J/Kg K for the gas.
Determine The initial and final Mach numbers.
A combustion chamber in a gas turbine plant receives
air at 350 K, 0.55 bar and 75 m/s. The air fuel ratio is
30 and the calorific value of the fuel is 42 MJ/Kg.
6 Evaluate a
Taking lambda= 1.4 and R = 287 J/Kg K for the gas
Determine: Final pressure, temperature and velocity of
the gas.
A combustion chamber in a gas turbine plant receives
7 Evaluate b
air at 350 K, 0.55 bar and 75 m/s. The air fuel ratio is

MLR Institute of Technology Page 138


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

30 and the calorific value of the fuel is 42 MJ/Kg.


Taking lambda= 1.4 and R = 287 J/Kg K for the gas
Determine: the maximum stagnation temperature
attainable
A combustion chamber in a gas turbine plant receives
air at 350 K, 0.55 bar and 75 m/s. The air fuel ratio is
30 and athe calorific value of the fuel is 42 MJ/Kg.
8 Taking lambda= 1.4 and R = 287 J/Kg K for the gas Analyze b
Determine: Percent stagnation pressure loss in the
combustion chamber and the maximum stagnation
temperature
Air is discharged from a reservoir from P0=6.91 bar,
T0= 325 0C through a nozzle to an exit pressure of 0.98
9 Evaluate a
bar. If the flow rate is 3600 kg/hr. Determine (for
isentropic flow )Area, Velocity and Pressure at throat
Air is discharged from a reservoir from P0=6.91 bar,
T0= 325 0C through a nozzle to an exit pressure of 0.98
10 Evaluate a
bar. If the flow rate is 3600 kg/hr. Determine (for
isentropic flow ) Maximum possible Velocity

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-III Short Answer Questions


1 Define a Normal Shock Wave Remember d
Shock Wave Cannot develop n Subsonic flows. State
2 Understand d
Reason
3 Define Strength of Shock Wave Remember d
4 Define Oblique Shock Wave Remember c
5 Give example of the moving shock waves in real life Understand e
Define critical Mach number and Drag divergence Remember
6 c
Mach number
What do you mean by strong shock and weak oblique
7 Remember a
shock solution
Draw a typical shock polar for a flow across oblique Understand
8 a
shock wave

MLR Institute of Technology Page 139


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Write the expression for Prandtl-Meyer expansion Understand


9 d
function
10 State the importance of area rule Understand d

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-III Long Answer Questions


Air enters a normal shock at a temperature of 350K
and a pressure of 137.8 kPa with a velocity of 750 ms-1.
1 Evaluate a
Determine Stagnation temperature, Stagnation
Pressure and Mach at inlet
Air enters a normal shock at a temperature of 350K
and a pressure of 137.8 kPa with a velocity of 750 ms-1.
2 Determine Stagnation temperature, Stagnation Evaluate d
Pressure, Static Temperature, Static Pressure, and Mach
no behind the shock wave
Air approaches the symmetric wedge with shock wave
3 angle 45.30 at a Mach No. of 3. Find Deflection angle a
and Pressure ratio
Air approaches the symmetric wedge with angle 300 at
4 a Mach No. of 3. Evaluate Density and Temperature Analyze a
ratios
In a supersonic flow of air at M1= 2.8 an oblique shock
of 420 emerges from a sharp concave corner.
5 Analyze a
Determine Deflection angle and Downstream Mach
No
A uniform supersonic flow at M=2 passes over a Analyze
wedge. An oblique shock wave making an angle 400
with flow direction is formed. If the static Pressure and
6 b
temperature in free stream are 0.5 bar and 273 K.
Determine wedge angle, Mach No., static temperature
and pressure behind shock
A normal shock wave occurs at a point in flow where
pressure is 30kPa and temperature is -30 0C. If Pressure
7 ratio across the shock wave is 2.6. Find velocities Evaluate b
upstream and downstream the shock wave. Also find
the change in stagnation pressure.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 140


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Air on up stream of shock is given by T1=0 0C, P1=60


8 kPa, V1= 497 m/s. Determine Mach No., Velocity and Evaluate d
Stagnation pressure downstream of shock wave
In a supersonic flow of air at M1= 2.8 an oblique shock Evaluate
9 of 420 emerges from a sharp concave corner. d
Determine Deflection angle
Airflows adiabatically in a pipe. A normal shock is Apply
formed. The Pressure and Temperature of air before
10 shock are 150 kN/m2 & 25 0C resp. The Pressure just d
after the shockwave is 350 kN/m2. Calculate Mach No
before and after shock

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-IV Short Answer Questions


1 Write short notes on Velocity Slip Understand a
What is the effect of thickness over performance of
2 Remember b
wings?
3 What is the effect of camber on performance of wings? Understand a
4 Define Aspect ratio Remember c
Write the effects of aspect ratio over the performance
5 Understand c
of wings?
6 What is meant by Transonic area rule? Remember b
7 What is meant by Sonic barrier? Remember a
8 Why drag increases drastically over sonic speed? Understand a
9 Name some transonic area ruled aircraft. Understand b
Distinguish between Lower and Upper Critical Mach Understand
10 a
number

Blooms
Course
S.
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-IVLong Answer Questions


MLR Institute of Technology Page 141
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

A diamond airfoil with semi Wedge angle =50, chord


1 (c) in supersonic flow at M = 2.5. Calculate lift if P∞ Apply a
=101325Pa

A diamond airfoil with semi Wedge angle =50, chord


2 1m in supersonic flow at M = 2.5. Calculate drag if P∞ Apply d
=101325 Pa

A flat plate size 1 m * 0.5 is tested at 1500 Kmph at the


freestream pressure of 0.8 MPa and temperature 30° C
3 Evaluate b
at an angle of attack of 5 degree. Using linear theory
Estimate the lift and drag

An incident Shock Wave angle 350 impinges on


4 straight wall. If Upstream Flow Properties are M=3, Apply e
P=1 atm, T=300K. Calculate Reflected wave Angles

A diamond airfoil with semi Wedge angle (e), max


Thickness (t) and chord (c). Prove that
5 Analyze b

Develop the transonic small perturbation equation as Analyze


given below from the basic.
6 b

The Mach number of a compressible flow is to be


determined from static probe and Pitot tube
7 measurements. If the static probe indicates 500 mm Analyze b
Hg suction and the pitot tube 350 mm Hg suction,
Determine the flow Mach number.

Air at 2 bar and 60°C enters a constant area pipe of 60


mm diameter with a velocity of 40 m/s. During the flow
through the pipe, heat is added to the air stream.
8 Evaluate b
Frictional effects are negligible and the values of Cp
and Cv are that of standard air. Calculate Mach
number of the flow

9 Consider the inviscid, adiabatic flow of air at free Evaluate c

MLR Institute of Technology Page 142


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

stream conditions, M1 = 6, P1 = 1 atm and T1 = 288 K


around a sharp expansion corner (θ = 20°) as shown
below. The Prandtl-Meyer function, ν, is given as a
function of Mach number. Assume air to be calorically
perfect with = 1.4. Evaluate The Mach number, M2,
downstream of the expansion corner is approximately

Consider the inviscid, adiabatic flow of air at free Evaluate


stream conditions, M1 = 6, P1 = 1 atm and T1 = 288 K
around a sharp expansion corner (θ = 15°) as shown
10 below. The Prandtl-Meyer function, ν, is given as a a
function of Mach number. Assume air to be calorically
perfect with = 1.4. Evaluate The Mach number, M2,
downstream of the expansion corner is approximately

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-V Short Answer Questions

Compare the main objectives of aerodynamic


1 Evaluation a
experiments?
Determine the procedure of selecting model for
2 Evaluation b
aerodynamic observations?
3 Define laminar and turbulent flow. Remember b
4 List out different forms of aerodynamic experiments? Remember e
5 Explain about the scaling parameters? Remember a
6 Explain about hypersonic wind tunnel? Remember c
7 Define draft wind tunnels? Remember d
Compare the disadvantages of Blow down type wind Evaluate
8 e
tunnels?
9 Explain draft wind tunnels? Remember c
10 Define shock tube? Remember a

Sl.No. Questions Blooms Course

MLR Institute of Technology Page 143


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Taxonomy Outcome
Level
UNIT-VLong Answer Questions

1 Explain Buckingham pi theorem with example Evaluation c


What is the significance of scale parameters? Compare any
2 Evaluation b
one parameter and its relation with experimentation.
3 Discuss the scaling laws used in aerodynamic modeling. Analysis a
Utilize some outcome from aerodynamic testing in relation
4 Analysis d
to design of airplane.
Determine the method of observation for aerodynamic
5 Evaluation e
experiments?
6 Summarize the classifications of wind tunnel? Create e
7 Differentiate turbulence factor of a subsonic wind tunnel? Analysis a
Explain with a neat diagram the layout of a subsonic wind
8 Evaluation a
tunnel
9 Interpolate subsonic and transonic speed regime? Apply b
Breakdown the difference between subsonic, supersonic
10 Analysis c
and hypersonic wind tunnel.

ASSIGNMENT QUESTION

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-I Short Answer Questions


1 Write the one dimensional energy flow for isentropic flow Understand a
Differentiate between Compressible and incompressible
2 Understand a
flows
Write steady flow energy equation for an adiabatic flow of
3 Understand d
air
What are the properties of flow medium on which the
4 Understand
velocity of sound through the medium depends upon?
Write internal energy equation for one dimensional high
5 Understand c
speed flow in general partial differential form.
What are the properties of flow medium that determine the
6 Understand b
velocity of sound wave in the medium?
7 What is isentropic compressibility Understand a

MLR Institute of Technology Page 144


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

8 How are flows classified based on Mach numbers Understand c


9 Compare Subsonic Flow and Supersonic flows Understand c
10 What Is the Use of Mach Number Understand a

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-I Long Answer Questions


Relate change in Pressure to that of Velocity for inviscid
1 Analyze a
incompressible flow
2 Categorize flows based on Mach Number Analyze c
3 Distinguish Subsonic Flow and Supersonic Flow Analyze b
Air is allowed to expand from an initial state A (where PA
= 3 x 105 N/m2 and TA = 333K) to state B (where PB =
1.034 x 105 N/m2 and TB = 305 K). Calculate the change
4 Apply f
in the specific entropy of the air, and show that the change
in entropy is the same for an isobaric process from A to
some intermediate state C
A ramjet flies at 11 km altitude with a flight mach number
of 0.9. In the inlet diffuser, the air is brought to the
stagnation condition so that it is stationary just before the
5 combustion chamber. Combustion takes place at constant Apply d
pressure and a temperature increase of 10000C results. The
combustion products are then ejected through the nozzle.
Calculate the stagnation pressure and temperature.
For an aircraft flying at a speed of 900kmph, find the
6 variation of speed of sound a, and Mach number M, with Analyze d
sea level and 8km altitude.
For an aircraft flying at a speed of 900kmph, find the
7 variation of speed of sound a, and Mach number M, with Analyze f
sea level and 11km altitude.
During a flight, a fighter aircraft attains its cruise speed of
1200 m/s at 10km altitude after taking off at 150 m/s from
8 sea level. Assuming the speed to have increased linearly Evaluate f
with altitude during the climb, Compute the Mach number
variation with altitude.
9 Air is allowed to expand from an initial state A (where PA Apply b

MLR Institute of Technology Page 145


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

= 2 x 105 N/m2 and TA = 333K) to state B (where PB =


1.034 x 105 N/m2 and TB = 305 K). Calculate the change
in the specific entropy of the air, and show that the change
in entropy is the same for an isothermal change from A to
some intermediate state D followed by an isentropic
change from D to B
Air flows through a duct. The pressure and temperature at
station 1 are P1 = 0.7 atm and T1 = 300C, respectively. At a
10 second station, the pressure is 0.5 atm. Calculate the Apply b
temperature and density at the second station. Assume the
flow to be isentropic

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-IIShort Answer Questions


1 Give Two Examples where Fanno flow Occurs Understand e
2 Define Rayleigh Flow Remember e
3 Define Rayleigh Line and explain Its Significance Remember d
4 Explain Choking in Rayleigh Flow Remember
5 Differentiate Between Fanno Flow and Rayleigh Flow Understand e
Why is a convergent divergent nozzle required to expand a
6 Remember e
flow from stagnation condition to supersonic velocity
Explain why a converging diverging configuration is Understand
7 required for the acceleration of flow from subsonic to a
supersonic condn
8 How does the back pressure affect the losses? Remember a
What are the flow losses that are suffered by a
9 Understand a
compressible flow in variable area ducts?
Derive an expression for choked mass flow rate through a Understand
10 converging diverging nozzle in terms of total pressure, c
total temperature and throat area

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

MLR Institute of Technology Page 146


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

UNIT-II Long Answer Questions


Differentiate Over Expanded and Under expanded
1 Analyze a
Nozzles
With a neat sketch Explain the variation of static pressure
2 of flow in a Convergent-Divergent nozzle under various Analyze a
back pressures.
Sketch The Isentropic and Adiabatic Expansion Process in
3 Analyze a
P-V and T- S Diagram
Draw the variations of P/P0 along the length of a
4 Evaluate f
convergent divergent section when it functions as Diffuser
Draw the variations of P/P0 along the length of a
5 Evaluate f
convergent divergent section when it functions as Nozzle
Draw the variations of P/P0 along the length of a
6 Evaluate a
convergent divergent section when it functions as Venturi
7 Differentiate Between Nozzle and a Venturi Analyze b
Develop a relation between Exit area and Throat area for a
8 Create b
supersonic Nozzle
Deduce the Relation between Area of Flow and Velocity
9 for a nozzle and state variation of Velocity with Area if Create b
flow is subsonic and Supersonic
A diffuser has ext to throat Area ratio of 1.5. The inlet Apply
Mach number is 0.8, Pressure is 1 atm, and Temperature is
10 c
150 C. Assume flow to be isentropic calculate Exit
Pressure

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-IIIShort Answer Questions


Calculate Strength of Normal Shock when shock
1 Apply a
appears at M=2
Compare supersonic flow over a wedge and cone with
2 Understand c
attached shock
3 Differentiate a Mach wave and Mach line Understand b
4 Using Sketch explain supersonic flow over a flat plate Understand a

MLR Institute of Technology Page 147


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

at an angle of attack
5 Write about super-critical airfoils? Remember a
6 Explain about windward and leeward surface Understand b
7 Write short notes on Small perturbation theory Understand b
8 Write short notes on Hodo Graphs Understand c
9 Write short notes on Shock Polar Understand c
10 Define 3D Relieving Effect Remember c

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-III Long Answer Questions


Differentiate between normal shock wave and oblique
1 Analyze a
shock wave
Find Relation Between Mach Number and Pressure Across
2 Evaluate a
a Normal Shock wave
Find Relation Between Mach Number and Density Across
3 Evaluate d
a Normal Shock wave
Find Relation Between Mach Number and Temperature
4 Evaluate d
Across a Normal Shock wave
A flat plate size 1 m * 0.5 is tested at 1500 Kmph at the
free stream pressure of 0.8 MPa and temperature 30° C at
5 an angle of attack of 5 degree. Using linear theory Evaluate d
Estimate the lift and
drag.
An aircraft flying at a Mach number 1.3 at an altitude
16000 m (p=0.15 bar, T = 216 K). The compression in its
engine is partly achieved by a normal shock wave standing
6 Apply a
at the entry of its diffuser. Determine Mach number and
Temperature of the air immediately downstream of the
shock.
An aircraft flying at a Mach number 2 at an altitude 10000 Analyze
m (p=0.3 bar, T = 276 K). The compression in its engine is
7 a
partly achieved by a normal shock wave standing at the
entry of its diffuser. Determine change in entropy of the

MLR Institute of Technology Page 148


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

air immediately downstream of the shock.


Apply Linearized theory to calculate Pressure Co efficient
8 Apply a
for a thin airfoil
Differentiate between Left Running and Right Running
9 Analyze d
Waves
Compare and contrast between type 5 and type 4 Analyze
10 d
intersection of Shock wave

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-IV Long Answer Questions


What are the key aspects of variations in aerodynamic
1 Understand c
parameter in case of hypersonic flow
At hypersonic speed how does CL for wing changes
2 Understand e
with AOA
At hypersonic speed how does CD for wing changes
3 Understand e
with AOA
4 Write a short notes on Aerodynamic heating Understand d
5 Write a short notes on Mach Number independence Understand a
6 Write a short notes on Law of hypersonic similarity Understand a
Write short notes on Dissociation of Molecules a Understand
7 d
Hypersonic Speed
8 Define Shock Layer Remember a
9 Discuss about entropy layer in hypersonic Flows Remember a
10 Discuss about thin shock layer in hypersonic Flows Remember a

Blooms
S. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-IV Long Answer Questions

1 A diamond airfoil with α=30, chord (c) in supersonic flow at Apply a


M = 2.5. Calculate lift and drag co-efficients if P∞= 0.3MPa

MLR Institute of Technology Page 149


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

using Linear Theory

A diamond airfoil with α=30, chord (c) in supersonic flow at


M = 2.5. Calculate lift and drag co-efficients if P∞= 0.3MPa
using Busemann Theory
2 Apply a

Compare Results obtained using both Linear Theory and


3 Evaluate b
Busemann Theory and State Which is more accurate

A flat plate size 1 m * 0.5 is tested at 1500 Kmph at the free


stream pressure of 0.8 MPa and temperature 30° C at an
4 Evaluate b
angle of attack of 5 degree. Using Busemann Theory
Estimate the lift and drag.

5 Predict the maximum density Ratio across a shock wave Evaluate b

Rewrite the Hypersonic shock Relation and state Mach


6 Evaluate e
Number Independence

Compare Newtonian Theory and Exact results for Cp on a Create


7 e
flat plate at an angle 50 and M=5 and Pinf = 101325Pa

Consider a flat plate at α = 150 in a Mach 4 free stream.


8 Using straight Newtonian theory, calculate lift and wave Evaluate a
drag coefficients.

Consider a flat plate at α = 150 in a Mach 7 free stream. Evaluate


9 Using straight Newtonian theory, calculate lift and wave a
drag coefficients.

Consider a flat plate at α = 200 in a Mach 5 free stream. Evaluate


10 Using straight Newtonian theory, calculate lift and wave a
drag coefficients.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 150


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-V Short Answer Questions


1 Explain the Buckingham’s Pi Theorem. Understand c
2 Briefly discuss the scale effects of similarities. Understand b
3 Discuss the classification of wind tunnels in detail. Understand a
4 Write the history of wind tunnel. Remember d
Explain the dynamic similarity between a wind tunnel Understand
model and the prototype to be flight-tested. What are the
5 essential conditions to be satisfied for the results to be g
carried from the model to the prototype? Are there any
limitations or preconditions involved?
State Buckingham theorem. How is thus theorem useful Understand
6 f
in the experiments using wind tunnels?
Compare the geometrical and dynamic similarities. Find
7 out the relation between geometrical parameters on Evaluate a
dynamic similarity.
8 Briefly explain the types non dimensionless number Understand a
Write notes on: setting Mach number in a transonic wind
9 Remember b
tunnel
10 Explain six component balance with neat sketch Understand c

Blooms Course
S. Taxonomy Outcome
Questions
No. Level

UNIT-V Long Answer Questions

1 Rewrite about the scaling procedure. Create a


2 Generate the scaling parameters for free flow fluid? Create a
3 Explain the term dynamic similarity. Create a
4 Differentiate between laminar and turbulent flow. Analyze b
Compare various types of wind tunnel used for
5 Evaluate a
aerodynamic studies.
6 Illustrate the advantages of Blow down type wind tunnels? Analyze b
Describe the distinctive features about automobile wind
7 Analyze e
tunnel
8 Describe brief about aerodynamic experiments Analyze c
Explain layouts, sizing and design parameters of
9 Create a
hypersonic wind tunnel.
10 Explain the losses of subsonic wind tunnel Analyze a

MLR Institute of Technology Page 151


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11. COURSE DESCRIPTION

Name of the Dept.:

Course Title FLIGHT MECHANICS-II


Course Code A2AE15

Regulation
Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits
Course Structure
3 -- - 4
V.Vamshi V.Vamshi

Team of Instructors V.Vamshi

11. 1 COURSE OVERVIEW:


The aim of this course, Flight mechanics-II A2AE15 is to introduce basic concepts of
stability and control, static longitudinal stability, static margin and maneuver stability. This
course also throws some light on maneuver point, aerodynamic stability derivatives and
control derivatives. The flight mechanics course also encompasses small disturbance
theory, dynamic motions of the aircraft i.e phugoid motion, Dutch roll, spiral divergence

11.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites


1. Introduction to aerospace
UG 3 3 engineering,
2. Flight mechanics-1,

11.3 COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:


c) Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)

University
Total
Session Marks (25M) End
Marks
Exam Marks
Mid Semester Test
There shall be two midterm examinations. 75 100
Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and
MLR Institute of Technology Page 152
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

objective type
tests.
The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration.
Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student
has to answer 2
questions, each carrying 5 marks. 75 100
The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes
duration. It consists
of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective type questions, the
student has to
answer all the questions and each carries half mark.
First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first
two and half units of syllabus and second midterm
examination shall be conducted for
the remaining portion.

d) Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing

S. No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment method (s)


Ability to understand the Equations of motion
a PPT, BLACK BOARD
in steady, symmetric pull-up maneuvers
Ability to analyze the problems in Control
PPT, BLACK BOARD,
b gradient, airplane lift curve slope and pitch
Assignment
stiffness..
Ability to understand the relation to control
c gradient, pitch stiffness. Stick fixed neutral PPT, BLACK BOARD
point- static margin
Ability to understand the Significance of
aerodynamic derivatives. Derivatives of
d axial, normal force components and pitching PPT, BLACK BOARD
moment with respect to the velocity, angle of
attack
Ability to understand the Derivatives of side
e force, rolling and yawing moments with PPT, BLACK BOARD
respect to the angle of roll rate, yaw rate
Ability to understand the Elevator hinge
f moments, coefficients- relation to control PPT, BLACK BOARD
stick forces. Hinge moment derivatives

MLR Institute of Technology Page 153


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I mid 80 M 20

2 I assignment - 05

3 II mid 80 M 20

4 II assignment - 05

5 External examination 3 Hours 75

Total 100

11.5 Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

S.No Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms Level


Understand the static Apply knowledge in
stability, marginal stability and understanding the
1 BL 1
the need for stability of the requiremnent of stability in
aircraft the aircrafts.
Derive an expression for static Understand the condition
longitudinal stability of the for static longitudinal
2 aircraft stability of the aircraft BL 2

Explain the condition for static Understand Contribution of


longitudinal stability, lateral the components for the static
3 and directional stability longitudinal stability BL 3

Explain the aircraft Analyze solutions for the


components for the stick force and hinge
longitudinal static stability of moments
4 BL 4
the aircraft

MLR Institute of Technology Page 154


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Explain the importance of the Analyze the Contribution of


aerodynamic derivatives i.e aircraft components for the
stability derivatives and control lateral and directional
5 BL 5
derivatives stability

Demonstrate dutch roll and Discuss the precaution to be


6 phugoid motions in the aircafts taken in cross landing BL 6
condition.

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply

BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create

15.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency


assessed by Blooms
Level

Knowledge in fundamentals of mathematics, science


A N Assignments
and engineering. Apply
An ability to identify, formulate and solve problems in
key areas of Aerodynamics, Structures, Propulsion, Assignments and Apply
B Flight Dynamics and Control, Design, Testing, Space H
and Missile Technologies and Aviation of Class test
Aeronautical Engineering discipline

An ability to design and conduct experiments, analyze Assignments


C and interpret data related to various areas of S Apply and
Aeronautical Engineering. Analyze
An ability in conducting investigations to solve
D problems using research based knowledge and N Assignments and
class test Apply
methods to provide logical conclusions.

E Skills to use modern engineering and IT tools, H ------------


software and equipment to analyze the problems in -----------

MLR Institute of Technology Page 155


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Aeronautical Engineering.

Understanding of impact of engineering solutions on


F the society to assess health, safety, legal, and social H ------- --------
issues in Aeronautical Engineering.

The impact of professional engineering solutions in


G environmental context and to be able to respond S Seminars and
Assignments
effectively to the needs of sustainable development. Analyze
and Justify

The knowledge of Professional and ethical Assignment and


H S
responsibilities. Class tests Analyze

An ability to work effectively as an individual and as


I H ------------- -------------
a team member/leader in multidisciplinary areas.
--
Assignments and
An ability to critique writing samples (abstract,
J executive summary, project report), and oral S Class Room Understan
d &
presentations. Presentations byAnalyze
students
Class Tests &
Knowledge of management principles and apply these Group Activity in
K H Apply
to manage projects in multidisciplinary environments.
class room

The need of self education and ability to engage in life


L S Assignments
- long learning. Apply

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

MLR Institute of Technology Page 156


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11.7 SYLLABUS:
(A72121) FLIGHT SCHEDULING AND OPERATIONS

(ELECTIVE- I)

SYLLABUS
UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION: Degree of freedom of a system, Static and dynamic stability. Need for
stability in an airplanes. Purpose of controls, inherently and marginally stable airplanes.

EQUATIONS OF MOTION: Equations of motion of a rigid body. Inertial forces and


moments.
Equations of motion of flight vehicles. Aerodynamic forces and moments. Decoupling of
longitudinal and lateral-directional equations. Linearization of equations.

UNIT - II
AERODYNAMIC STABILITY DERIVATIVES: Aerodynamic stability and control
derivatives. Relation to geometry, flight configuration. Effects of power, compressibility
and flexibility.

UNIT - III
STATIC LONGITUDINAL STABILITY - CONTROL FREE: Effects of releasing the
elevator.
Hinge moment coefficients, Control forces to trim. Control free neutral point - Trim tabs.
Aerodynamic balancing of control surfaces. Means of augmentation of control.
MANEUVER STABILITY: Contribution of pitch damping to pitching moment of flight
vehicle, Effect on trim and stability. Control deflections and control forces for trim in
symmetric maneuvers and coordinated turns. Control deflection and force gradients.
Control fixed and control free maneuver stability. Maneuver points. Maneuver margins.

UNIT - IV
STATIC LONGITUDINAL STABILITY AND CONTROL - CONTROL FIXED:
Stick Fixed:Basic equilibrium equation, Stability criterion, Contribution of wing and tail
and elevator to pitching moments. Effect of fuselage and nacelles, Effects of center of
gravity location, Power effects Stabilizer setting and center of gravity location, Elevator
power, Elevator to trim . Trim gradients. Control fixed static stability, Control fixed neutral
point. Stability margins.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 157


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

UNIT - V
STATIC LATERAL AND DIRECTIONAL STABILITY AND CONTROL: Dihedral
effect,
Coupling between rolling and yawing moment, Adverse yaw, Aileron power, Aileron
reversal. Weather cocking effects, Rudder power. Lateral and directional stability-
definition. Control surface deflections in steady sideslips, rolls and turns one engine
inoperative conditions, Rudder lock.

DYNAMIC STABILITY AND RESPONSE TO CONTROL: Solutions to the stability


quadratic of the linearised equations of motion. The principal modes. Phugoid , Short
Period Dutch Roll and Spiral modes, Further approximations. Restricted degrees of motion.
Solutions. Response to controls. Auto rotation and spin.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Houghton E. L, Carruthers N. B. (2010), Aerodynamics for Engineering Students, 5th
edition,
Elsevier, USA.
2. Mc. Cormic B. W. (2010), Aerodynamics, Aeronautics and Flight Mechanics, Wiley
India Pvt.
Ltd, USA.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Perkins C. D, Robert Hage E (2003), Airplane Performance, Stability and Control, Wiley
Toppan, USA.
2. Nelson R. C (2007), Flight Stability and Automatic Control, SIE edition, McGraw Hill,
New York.
3. T. R. Yechout, S. L. Morns (2003), Introduction to Aircraft Flight Mechanics, AIAA
Publishers,
USA.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 158


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning
Outcomes.

Lecture Course Learning Blooms


Topics to be covered Reference
No. Outcomes level
UNIT- I:NETWORK T1 & R2 1
FLOWS AND INTEGER
PROGRAMMING
MODELS:
1-5 DEFINE
Complexity of airline planning,
operations and dispatch- need for
optimization- role of operations
research and simulation

Networks- definitions, network flow T1 & R2 3


models- shortest path problem,
5-10 CLASSIFICATION minimum cost flow problem,
maximum flow problem, multi-
commodity problem
Integer programming T1 & R2 2
models- set covering/
partitioning problems,
traveling salesman problem-
DESCRIBE mathematical formulation-
10-19
decision variables, objective
function, constraints,
methods of solution.
Solution by simulation.
UNIT 2: AIRCRAFT ROUTING T1 & R2 2
DEFINE
AND MANAGEMENT OF
IRREGULAR OPERATIONS:
20-28
Goal of aircraft routing-
maintenance requirements, other
constraints. Routing cycles, route

MLR Institute of Technology Page 159


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

generators. Mathematical models of


routing- decision variables,
objective functions, alternatives,
constraints- flight coverage and
aircraft available

Example problems and T1 & R2 2


29-32 solutions. The problem
statement, the time band
DISCUSSING
approximation model-
formulation of the problem-
the scenarios- solution.
DEFINE UNIT3: FLIGHT T1 & R2 1
SCHEDULING:
Significance of flight
35-38 scheduling. The route
system of the airlines- point-
to-point flights, hub and
spoke flights
Explain Schedule construction- operational T1 & R2 2
39-40
feasibility, economic viability
DISCUSS Route development and T1 & R2 2
flight scheduling process-
41-42
load factor and frequency-
case study.
EXPLAIN UNIT-IV: FLEET T1 & R2 2
ASSIGNMENT AND
CREW AND
MANPOWER
SCHEDULING
Purpose of fleet assignment.
Fleet types, fleet diversity,
43-52 fleet availability-
performance measures,
Formulation of the fleet
assignment problem-
decision variables, objective
function, constraints,
solution. Scenario analysis,
fleet assignment models
Crew scheduling process- T1 & R2 2
significance. Development of crew
53-59 EXPLAIN
pairing- pairing generators-
mathematical formulation of crew

MLR Institute of Technology Page 160


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

pairing problem- methods of


solution. Crew rostering- rostering
practices..
T1 & R2 3
The crew rostering problem-
formulation, solutions.
Calculate Manpower scheduling-
60-62 modeling, formulation of the
problem, solutions.

Differentiate UNIT-V: GATE ASSIGNMENT T1 & R2 4


AND AIRCRAFT BOARDING
63-68 STRATEGY: Gate assignment-
significance- the problem- levels of
handling-passenger flow, distance
matrix- mathematical formulation,
solution
Compare Common strategies for T1 & R2 5
69-71 aircraft boarding process,
mathematical model,
interferences, model .

11.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF


PROGRAM OUTCOMES

Program Outcomes
Course objectives
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
I S H S S S H S
II H H S S S H H
III H H H S S H S
IV H S S H S S H S
V H H H H S S H H
VI H H S S S H
VII H H H H S S H

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

MLR Institute of Technology Page 161


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF


PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
A B C D E F G H I J K L M

a) H H H S H S S H H

b) H H H

c) H H H H H H H

d) H H H H S H H

e) H S H H H H H S

f) H H S H S S

g) H H S S H H H S S

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

Prepared by: V.Vamshi

11.11 SESSION PLANNER/ SYLLABUS COVERAGE

Subject: Flight Scheduling and Operations

Topics to Date Date


Unit Lectu Teaching Refere
be Session objective Link planne cond
no re no methodology nces
covered d ucted

1. Bythe end of
this session
Moments student will be
on aircraft able to T1
I
L1 in understand Chalk & talk &
uncelebrat moments acting
R2
ed flight on the aircraft
2. student will be
able to
understand what

MLR Institute of Technology Page 162


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

happens to
aircraft in
uncelebrated
flight condition

1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
Contributi
understand
on of
contributions
principal
done by the
componen
principal
L2 ts, Chalk & talk
components
Equations
2. student will be
of
able to
equilibriu
understand
m
equations of
motion

1. student will be T1 &


thrust ,
able to R2
angle of
understand what
attack,
is thrust 2.student
L3 elevator Chalk & talk
will be able to
angle
understand
required to
elevator angle,
trim
trim

1. Student will be T1 &


Control able to R2
gradient, understand lift
airplane curve slope 2.
L4 lift curve student will be Chalk & talk
slope and able to
pitch understand
stiffness. different types of
control gradient

Tailless 1. Student will be T1 & https://


aircraft able to R2 www.y
L5 and understand forces Chalk & talk outube.
aircraft acting on the com/wa
with four tailless aircraft tch?v=

MLR Institute of Technology Page 163


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

planes, 2. student will be GXZhw


Longitudi able to wQBE1
nal static understand o
stability stability types
definition,

1. Student will be
Effect of able to
flaps and understand forces
flight that are acting
speed on because of flaps T1 &
L6 Chalk & talk
force and 2. student will be R2
moment able to
coefficient understand
s moment
coefficients

Aerodyna T1 & https://


mic 1. Student will be R2 www.y
derivatives able to outube.
, stability understand what com/wa
relation to are aerodynamic tch?v=
control derivatives WN3Rb
gradient, 2. student will be 9wVY
L7 Chalk & talk
pitch able to DY
stiffness. understand
Stick fixed stability stick
neutral fixed condition
point- and what is
static neutral margin
margin

1. Student will be T1 & https://


able to R2 www.y
Equations understand outube.
of motion different types of com/wa
in steady, equation of tch?v=
L8 Chalk & talk
symmetric motions 2. UtSrgT
pull-up student will be sKUfU
maneuvers able to
understand pull
up maneuver

MLR Institute of Technology Page 164


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

conditions

1. Student will be T1 &


Pitch rate, able to R2
pitch understand what
damping. is meant by pitch
L9 Control to 2. student will be Chalk & talk
trim, able to
control understand trim
gradient and its
importance

1. Student will be T1 &


maneuver able to R2
point, understand what
maneuver is maneuver point
L10 margin- 2. student will be Chalk & talk
relation to able to
static understand its
margin relation with
margin condition

1. Student will be T1 &


Trim
able to R2
curves-
understand what
trim and
is maneuver point
control of
L11 2. student will be Chalk & talk
highly
able to
stable,
understand its
marginally
relation with
stable
margin condition

1. Student will be T1 & https://


able to R2 www.y
unstable understand what outube.
aircraft- are trim curves com/wa
L12 safety 2. student will be Chalk & talk tch?v=v
implicatio able to NqE_L
ns,. understand DTsa0
importance of
maneuver points
stable and

MLR Institute of Technology Page 165


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

unstable aircrafts

1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand what
are trim curves
Determina 2. student will be
L13 tion of able to Chalk & talk
neutral understand
importance of
maneuver points
stable and
unstable aircrafts

1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand what
are trim curves
Maneuver
2. student will be
points by
L14 able to Chalk & talk
flight
understand
testing
importance of
maneuver points
stable and
unstable aircrafts

1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand what
are trim curves
Maneuver
2. student will be
points by
L15 able to PPT
flight
understand
testing
importance of
maneuver points
stable and
unstable aircrafts

1. student will be T1 &


mock test able to R2
L16 Chalk & talk
1 understand the
important

MLR Institute of Technology Page 166


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

questions and
area from which
questions are
asked in exam

Significan T1 &
ce of R2
aerodyna
mic 1. Student will be
derivatives able to
. understand what
Derivative are the normal
L17 s of axial, components Chalk & talk
normal 2. student will be
force able to
componen understand
ts and pitching moments
pitching
moment
with

respect to T1 &
the 1. Student will be R2
velocity, able to
angle of understand
attack normal force
L18 Derivative components Chalk & talk
s of axial, 2. student will be
normal able to
force understand angle
componen of attack
ts

pitching 1. Student will be T1 &


moment able to R2
with understand
respect to importance of
L19 pitch rate, pitch rate Chalk & talk
elevator 2. student will be
angle able to
Derivative understand
s of side rolling

MLR Institute of Technology Page 167


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

force, advantages
rolling

yawing 1. Student will be T1 &


L20 Chalk & talk
moments able to R2
with understand what
Derivative T1 & https://
s of side R2 www.y
1. Student will be
force, outube.
able to
rolling and com/wa
understand what
yawing tch?v=g
is side force
moments vemr8w
L21 2. student will be Chalk & talk
with cbXk
able to
respect to
understand its
the angle
II effect in the
of roll
stability
rate, yaw
rate

Derivative T1 &
s of side R2
1. Student will be
force,
able to
rolling and
understand
yawing
derivation of the
moments
side force
L22 with Chalk & talk
2. student will be
respect to
able to
roll rate,
understand
yaw rate
respect to the
aileron,
control surface
rudder
deflections

1. student will be T1 &


dependenc able to R2
e on understand how
vehicle to design the
L23 geometry control surfaces Chalk & talk
flight 2.student will be
configurati able to
on- understand with
estimation respect to the

MLR Institute of Technology Page 168


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

- the strip vehicle geometry


theory
method

L24 Lateral T1 &


1. Student will be
and R2
able to
directional
understand what
stability
are the cross
roll and
derivatives
yaw
2. student will be Chalk & talk
damping
able to
Aileron
understand their
and rudder
effects in the
power, the
stability of the
cross
aircraft
derivatives

L25 1. Student will be T1 &


Relation able to R2
between understand
Dimension difference
-less and between the
dimension dimension
Chalk & talk
al 2. student will be
aerodyna able to
mic understand
derivatives dimensionless
. parameters and
their effects

L26 1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand
difference
aerodyna between the
mic dimension Chalk & talk
derivatives 2. student will be
able to
understand
dimensionless
parameters and

MLR Institute of Technology Page 169


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

their effects

L27 1. student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand the
mock test important
Chalk & talk
2 questions and
area from which
questions are
asked in exam

L28 1. Student will be T1 &


Elevator
able to R2
hinge
understand stick
moments,
forces
coefficient
2. student will be Chalk & talk
s- relation
able to
to control
understand hinge
stick
moments acting
forces
on the aircraft

1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand stick
. Hinge forces
L29 moment 2. student will be Chalk & talk
derivatives able to
understand hinge
moments acting
on the aircraft

1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand stick
Hinge forces
L30 moment 2. student will be Chalk & talk
derivatives able to
understand hinge
moments acting
on the aircraft

MLR Institute of Technology Page 170


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

L31 1. Student will be T1 & https://


able to R2 www.y
Stick force
understand what outube.
to trim in
are the stick com/wa
Symmetric
forces tch?v=
uncelebrat Chalk & talk
2. student will be BUGIh
ed flight
able to EecipE
,maneuver
understand need
ing flight
to trim the
aircraft

L32 1. Student will be T1 &


Stick force able to R2
gradients- understand effect
effect of of trim 2.
Chalk & talk
trim student will be
speed- role able to
of trim tab understand and
its requirements

L33 1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
Effect of understand
freeing importance of the
elevator tail
Chalk & talk
on tail 2. student will be
effectiven able to
ess, understand
freeing elevator
its effect

L34 1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
Static and
understand
maneuver
elevator
stability. Chalk & talk
2. student will be
Elevator-
able to
free factor
understand its
importance

L35 Stick-free 1. Student will be Chalk & talk T1 &


neutral able to R2

MLR Institute of Technology Page 171


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

and understand
maneuver stability margins
points, 2. student will be
stability able to
margins- understand
relation relations and
with stick importance
force
gradients

L36 Aerodyna T1 &


mic and R2
mass 1. Student will be
balancing able to
of control understand
III Surfaces different types of
Control control surfaces Chalk & talk
tabs- 2. student will be
types, able to
function, understand its
and functions
constructi
on

L37 1. Student will be T1 &


Lateral- able to R2
directional understand
static directional
stability, stability Chalk & talk
definition, 2. student will be
requireme able to
nts understand its
requirements

L38 Aerodyna 1. Student will be T1 & https://


mic forces able to R2 www.y
and understand outube.
moments aerodynamic com/wa
Chalk & talk
Aileron, forces tch?v=8
elevator 2. student will be P1B3_a
and rudder able to eAbA
required to understand its

MLR Institute of Technology Page 172


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

trim the requirements on


aircraft the control
due to side surfaces
slip
L39 Aileron, T1 &
1. Student will be
rudder, R2
able to
elevator
understand the
and thrust
effects of side
required to
slip
trim Chalk & talk
2. student will be
aircraft in
able to
roll,
understand the
coordinate
other aircraft
d turn,
components
aileron,
L40 1. Student will be T1 &
rudder able to R2
control understand the
powers effects of side
Adverse slip
Chalk & talk
aileron 2. student will be
yaw. able to
Gravity understand the
forces other aircraft
components

1. Student will be T1 & https://


Equilibriu
able to R2 www.y
m of
understand what outube.
forces and
happens in the
moments. com/wa
L41 engine out
Engine out Chalk & talk tch?v=d
condition
condition. GicGk
2. student will be
Cross mvU9
able to
wind
understand its M
landings
effects

L42 1. student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand the
mock test
important Chalk & talk
3
questions and
area from which
questions are

MLR Institute of Technology Page 173


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

asked in exam
L43 1. Student will be T1 &
able to R2
understand
different of axis
Descriptio
systems relative
n of
to the body
motion of Chalk & talk
motions
flight
2. student will be
vehicle
able to
understand wind,
stability axes-
IV relative merits
L44 1. Student will be T1 & https://
able to R2 www.y
understand outube.
- systems different of axis
com/wa
of systems relative
reference to the body tch?v=
Chalk & talk qxUpf
frames- motions
earth axis 2. student will be Wr3BT
system able to M
understand wind,
stability axes-
relative merits

L45 1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand
Body, different of axis
wind, systems relative
stability to the body
Chalk & talk
axes- motions
relative 2. student will be
merits able to
understand wind,
stability axes-
relative merits

L46 Rotating 1. Student will be T1 &


axis able to R2
system- understand
Chalk & talk
expression rotating axis
s for linear system of rigid
and body

MLR Institute of Technology Page 174


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

angular 2. student will be


moments able to
of rigid understand
body, time angular moments
derivatives of rigid body,
time derivatives
L47 Inertia 1. Student will be T1 &
tensor, able to R2
componen understand
ts of linear importance of
and tensor Chalk & talk
angular 2. student will be
velocities, able to
acceleratio understand
ns acceleration
L48 1. Student will be T1 &
able to R2
understand what
Componen
are the
ts of
components of
aerodyna
aerodynamics Chalk & talk
mic,
forces
gravity
2. student will be
Forces,
able to
understand
gravity

1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand what
Moments
are the moments
L49 applied on
applied Chalk & talk
flight
2. student will be
vehicle.
able to
understand on the
gravity

1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
Equations understand
of motion- equation of
L50 Chalk & talk
longitudin motion
al. 2. student will be
able to
understand

MLR Institute of Technology Page 175


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

directional
stability
1. Student will be T1 &
able to R2
understand
equation of
L51 lateral- motion
Chalk & talk
directional 2. student will be
able to
understand
directional
stability
1. Student will be T1 &
Relation able to R2
between understand
angular Relation between
L52 velocity angular velocity
Chalk & talk
componen components
ts and 2. student will be
Euler able to
angle rate understand Euler
angle rate

1. Student will be T1 & https://


able to R2 www.y
Determina
understand what outube.
tion of
is the velocities com/wa
L53 velocities
of airplane Chalk & talk tch?v=
of airplane
2. student will be TRheu
in earth
able to D5PNJ
axis
understand earth w
system.
axis system

1. Student will be T1 &


Determina able to R2
tion of understand
vehicle trajectory of the
trajectory- vehicle
outline of 2. student will be
L54 Chalk & talk
method able to
Equation understand
of motion Equation of
in motion in
perturbatio perturbation
n variables variables

L55 1. Student will be Chalk & talk T1 &


Assumptio able to

MLR Institute of Technology Page 176


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

n of small understand R2
perturbatio perturbation
ns, first theory
order 2. student will be
approxima able to
tions understand first
linearised order
equations approximations
of motion linearised
equations of
motion

L56 T1 &
Decouplin R2
g-
conditions
1. Student will be
for
able to
validity,
understand pert
role of
bated equations
symmetry
of longitudinal
Linearised Chalk & talk
2. student will be
longitudin
able to
al and
understand and
Lateral-
lateral directional
directional
equations
equations
of
perturbed
motion
L57 1. Student will be T1 &
able to R2
Review of
understand
solutions
different types of
of first and
the differential
second
equation
order Chalk & talk
2. student will be
ordinary
able to
differentia
understand
l
solutions of first
equations.
and differential
equations
L58 time 1. Student will be T1 &
constant, able to R2
undamme understand Chalk & talk
d natural frequency
Frequency 2. student will be
and able to

MLR Institute of Technology Page 177


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

damping understand
ratio damping ratios of
the aircraft

L59 1. student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand the
mock test important Chalk & talk
4 questions and
area from which
questions are
asked in exam

L60 Linearised 1. Student will be T1 &


longitudin able to Chalk & talk R2
al understand
equations aircraft equations
L61 1. Student will be T1 &
able to R2
understand
aircraft equations
of the motion in
aircraft
different degree
three Chalk & talk
of freedom
degree of
2. student will be
freedom
able to
understand
Linearised
longitudinal
equations
L62 1. Student will be T1 &
able to R2
Analysis-
understand
solutions-
different mode 2.
principal
student will be Chalk & talk
modes of
able to
motion-
understand the
characteris
aircraft with
tics.
respect to the
motion in air
Mode 1. Student will be T1 & https://
shapes- able to R2 www.y
significanc understand outube.
L63 Chalk & talk
e Two significance of com/wa
degree of the degree of tch?v=
freedom freedom. hQ8D

MLR Institute of Technology Page 178


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2.student will be W2Mj7


able to 0Y
understand
Mode shapes-

L64 constant T1 &


speed R2
approxima
1. Student will be
tion
able to
constant
understand
angle of
importance of
attack
1dof Chalk & talk
approxima
2. student will be
tion one
able to
degree of
understand
freedom
approx solutions
approxima
tions
solutions

L65 compariso T1 &


1. Student will be
n with R2
able to
three
V understand lateral
degree of
directional
freedom
equations Chalk & talk
solutions
2. student will be
justificatio
able to
n of
understand
approxima
solutions of dof
tions

L66 1. Student will be T1 &


Lateral
able to R2
directional
understand
equations,
directional
Lower
equations
order Chalk & talk
2. student will be
analysis-
able to
approxima
understand lower
te
order analysis of
solutions
motions

L67 three 1. Student will be T1 &


degree of able to R2
freedom understand Chalk & talk
analysis principle modes
principal of aircraft
modes- 2. student will be
MLR Institute of Technology Page 179
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

characteris able to
tics- mode understand
shapes shapes and
significanc significance of
e the aircraft

L68 Determina T1 &


tion of R2
longitudin
1. student will be
al and
able to
lateral
understand
stability
stability
from
coefficients
coefficient
2. student will be Chalk & talk
s of
able to
characteris
understand
tic
stability criteria
equation-
and roots of
stability
equation
criteria,
approxima
te roots

L69 1. student will be T1 & https://


able to R2 www.y
Special understand outube.
problems problems in com/wa
in aircraft dynamic Chalk & talk tch?v=
dynamics- 2.student will be NpwNZ
roll able to TcYWE
understand roll k
of the aircraft

L70 1. Student will be T1 &


able to R2
understand
coupling of
coupling,
aircraft
high angle
2. student will be Chalk & talk
of attack
able to
operation
understand what
happens to
aircraft at high
angle of attack

L71 aircraft 1. Student will be T1 &


spin- able to Chalk & talk R2
entry, understand

MLR Institute of Technology Page 180


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

balance of aircraft spin


forces in recovery
steady 2. balance forces
spin, in spin and
recovery, recovery from
pilot spin
Technique
s

11.12 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS


20 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS FROM EACH UNIT (CHOOSE THE CORRECT
ANSWER)

UNIT-I

1. For a trim position the value of Cmcg (A)


A) 1
B) -1
C) 0
D) -3.5

2. For stability of Aircraft Cm alpha (B)


A) positive
B) Negative
C) infinite
D) Finite positive

3. Tail effectiveness is always (C)


A)<1
B).2
C)>2
D) <1.5
MLR Institute of Technology Page 181
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

4. Static margin is -------------------------quantity (D)


A) Negative
B) Infinite
C) positive
D)0

5. CG position of high wing (B)


A) On the chord line
B) Above the chord line
C) Chord line it self
D) Below the chord line

6. CG position of low wing (B)


A) above the chord line
B) Below the chord line
C) on the chord line
D) chord line it self

7. Relation between Elevator power and elevator effectiveness (C)


A)inverse
B) linear
C) non linear
D)proportional

8. Most aft CG position where Aircraft is neutrally stable (D)


A) Center of pressure
B) Mean aerodynamic chord
C) Aerodynamic center
D) Neutral point

9. About Aerodynamic centre moment coefficient is (C)


A) zero
B) Varies
C) constant
D) infinite

10.CG position after the neutral point Aircraft is (D)


A) Neutrally stable
B) Stable
C) Neutrally stable or stable depends on angle of attack
D) Unstable

11. For turn maneuver load factor is (A)


A) <1
B) 2.5
C) 1

MLR Institute of Technology Page 182


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

D) >1

12. For unaccelarated flight load factor is (A)


A) 1
B) 2.96
C) 1.5
D) 2

13. In maneuvers angle of attack of the tail is (A)


A) constant
B) Varies
C) Increases
D) Decreases

14. Stick free stability is ----------------------- the stick fix stability (B)
A) >
B) <
C) 0
D) 1.5

15. Most aft position of CG is (C)


A) Mean aerodynamic chord
B) Center of pressure
C) Neutral point
D) Aerodynamic center

16.As CG moves forward stability is (D)


A) will be zero
B)remains constant
C)decreases
D) increases

17.Pitch damping is always (C)


A)non zero
B)zero
C) negative
D)positive

18.The radius of vertical turn of a Aircraft is prortional to (A)


A)V2
B)V1.5
C) V3
D) V2.5

19. The relation between turn radius and acceleration is (D)


A) Proportional

MLR Institute of Technology Page 183


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

B) Zero
C)Non Zero
D) Inverse Proportional

20. For a mass balance the position of CG is (C)


A) Hinge Line
B) On The hinge Line
C) Ahead Of Hinge Line
D) Below the Hinge Line

UNIT-II
1. Load factor defined as (C)
A) L/D
B) D/L
C) L/W
D) W/L

2. Load factor in turn, if Φ is angle of bank (D)


A) 1/sinΦ
B) sinΦ
C) sinΦ+cosΦ
D) None of these

3. For military aircraft turn rate should be (A)


A) maximum
B) minimum
C) moderate
D)depends on weight of aircraft

4.The magnitude of centripetal force in turn, if Φ is angle of bank, ( C)


A) L cosΦ
B) LtanΦ
C) L sinΦ
D) W sinΦ

5. For civil aircraft turn radius should be (A)


A) maximum
B) minimum
C) modera
D)depends on weight of aircraft

6. In flight envelope diagram the variable on X axis is (C)


A) weight
B) pressure
C)velocity
D)viscosity

MLR Institute of Technology Page 184


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

7. Relation between lift and weight in pull up (A)


A) L+W
B) L/W
C)W-L
D)L-W

8.For military aircraft turn radius should be (B)


A) maximum
B) minimum
C) moderate
D)depends on weight of aircraft

9.At corner velocity load factor should be (A)


A) maximum
B) minimum
C) moderate
D)depends on weight of aircraft

10.For military aircraft turn radius should be (B)


A) maximum
B) minimum
C) moderate
D)depends on weight of aircraft

11. Height remains constant in during following turn (B)


A) Instaneous turn
B) Coordinated turn
C) pull-up
D) pull down

12.At corner velocity lift coefficient should be (A )


A) Maximum
B) minimum
C) moderate
D) depends on weight of aircraft

13.At energy height total Potential energy is converted in (A )


A) Kinetic energy
B) Internal energy
C) Total energy
D) None of these

14.The aerodynamic limit are set by ( C)


A)Load factor
B) weight
C)velocity
D) stall velocity

MLR Institute of Technology Page 185


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

15.At stall velocity lift coefficient should be (A )


A) Maximum
B) minimum
C) moderate
D)depends on weight of aircraft

16.Aircraft taking turn with bank angle 60 degrees, then its load factor is ( C )
A)3
B) 2.5
C) 2
D)2.1

17.Imbalance of thrust forces causes (C)


A) lateral maneuver
B) Longitudinal maneuver
C) Directional maneuver
D) roll oscillations

18.Select the sustained turn (C)


A)pull up
B) pull down
C) level turn
D)none of these

19.The following diagram tells about maneuver boundaries (C)


A) D V diagram
B) T V diagram
C) V g diagram
D) none of these

20.In flight envelope diagram the variable on Y axis is (D)


A) weight
B) pressure
C)velocity
D) none of these

UNIT-III
1.In flight dynamic analysis plane of symmetry is________ (C)
A) XY
B) YZ
C) XZ
D) X’Y’

2.Unit of moment of inertia is _________ (B)


A) Kg-M4
B) Kg-M2

MLR Institute of Technology Page 186


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

C) Kg/M
D) Kg/M3

3.Euler angles are_______ (C)


A) Pitch,Yaw,Roll
B) Pitch, Roll, Yaw
C) Yaw,Roll,Pitch
D) Yaw,Pitch,Roll

4.Moment of Inertia is resistence to________. (A)


A) Angular Velocity
B) Torque
C) Angular
D) Linear

5. For inertial reference frame acceleration is__________ (D)


A) Non Zero
B) Finite
C) In Finite
D) Zero

6. Coupling at low speed exits between________&________ (C)


A) Pitch, Yaw
B) Pitch, Roll
C) Roll, Yaw
D) Yaw,Pitch,Roll

7. Body axis system will emanate from__________ (D)


A) Aircraft NP
B) Aircraft AC
C) Aircraft CP
D) Aircraft CG

8. Wind axis will align with_________axis (A)


A) X
B) Z
C) Y
D) Z Or X

9. Side wash generates from_______ (B) A) Fuselage & Tail Juncture


B) Fuselage & Wing Juncture
C) Tail & Wing Juncture
D) Nacelle & Wing Juncture

10.Dihedral wing provides_________stability (C)


A) Pitch
B) Yaw

MLR Institute of Technology Page 187


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

C) Roll
D) Pitch And Yaw

11.Coupling effects will be minimized with (C)


A) Aerodynamic Balancing
B) Mass Balancing
C) Aerodynamic And Mass Balencing
D) None Of These

12.Roll rate increases as span___________ (C)


A) Invariant
B) Decreases
C) Increases
D) Remains Constant

13. When aircraft is in curved path angle of attack of tail_______ (D)


A) Invariant
B) Decreases
C) Increases or Decreases
D) Increases

14.Aircraft principal axis is ______ (C)


A) X
B) Z
C) Y
D) Z Or X

15.Pitch rate is increases due to increase in ___________ (B)


A) Up Wash
B) Down Wash
C) Wing Angle Of Attack
D) Tail Angle Of Attack

16.Change in angle of attack due to roll velocity proportional to _______ ( A)


A) Roll Rate
B) Yaw Rate
C) Pitch Rate
D) Tail Angle Of Attack

17.For steady turn bank angle is equal to _______ (D )


A) Remains Constant
B) 13 Degrees
C) Non Zero
D) Zero

MLR Institute of Technology Page 188


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

18.For pure longitudinal motion roll rate equal to ________ ( D)


A) Finite
B) 15 Rad/Sec
C) Non Zero
D) Zero

19.With respect to symmetry axis system Ixy is equal to ________ (B )


A) Finite
B) Zero
C) Non Zero
D) Constant

20.For analysis of longitudinal motion yaw rate__________ (B )


A) Finite
B) Zero
C) Non Zero
D) Constant

UNIT-IV
1.Which aero plane behavior will be corrected by a yaw damper? (A)
A) Spiral dive.
B) Buffeting.
C) Dutch roll.
D) Tuck under.

2. The aft movement of the centre of pressure during the acceleration through the transonic
flight regime will: ( B)
A) Decrease the static lateral stability.
B) Increase the static longitudinal stability.
C) Decrease the longitudinal stability.
D) Increase the static lateral stability.

3. The relative thickness of an aerofoil is expressed in: (D)


A) Camber.
B) Meters.
C) Degrees cross section tail angle.
D) % chord.

4. One disadvantage of the swept back wing is it's stalling characteristics. At the stall : (B )
A ) wing root stall will occur first, which produces a rolling moment
B ) tip stall will occur first, which produces a nose-down moment
c) Leading edge stall will occur first, which produces a nose- down moment
D ) tip stall will occur first, which produces a pitch-up moment.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 189


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

5. Shock induced separation results in (A)


A) Decreasing lift.
B) Constant lift.
C)increasing lift.
D) Decreasing drag.

6. The max aft position of the centre of gravity is amongst others limited by the: (B)
A ) minimum value of the stick force per g.
B) maximum longitudinal stability of the aeroplane.
C)maximum elevator deflection.
D ) too small effect of the controls on the aeroplane.

7. The critical Mach Number of an aeroplane can be increased by: (A)


A) sweep back of the wings.
B) vortex generators.
C) control deflection
D) dihedral of the wings.

8. If an aeroplane flies in the ground effect ( A)


A) the lift is increased and the drag is decreased.
B) the effective angle of attack is decreased.
C) the induced angle of attack is increased.
D) drag and lift are reduced.

9. Flap selection at constant IAS in straight and level flight will increase the : ( B)
A) lift and the drag.
B) maximum lift coefficient (CLmax) and the drag.
C) lift coefficient and the drag.
D) stall speed.

10. Which one of the following systems suppresses the tendency to "Dutch roll"? ( D)
A )Rudder limiter.
B) Yaw damper.
C) Roll spoilers.
D) Spoiler mixer.

11.In Isothermal region constant atmospheric property is ( C)


A)Pressure
B)Density
C) Temperature
D)Viscocity

12. At a constant mass, angle of attack and configuration, the power required at a higher
altitude: ( B)
(A) increases and the air speed increases by the same percentage
(B) increases and the air speed remains constant

MLR Institute of Technology Page 190


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

(C) decreases slightly because of the decreased density


(D) remains unchanged but the air speed increases

13. In what way is the longitudinal stability affected by the degree of positive camber of the
aerofoil? (A)
a)Positive, because the centre of pressure shifts rearward at increasing angle of attack.
b)Negative, because the lift vector rotates forward at increasing angle of attack.
c)Positive, because the lift vector rotates backward at increasing angle of attack.
d)No effect, because camber of the aerofoil produces a constant pitch down moment
coefficient, independent of angle of attack.

14. Trailing edge flap extension will: ( B)


A) decrease the critical angle of attack and decrease the value of CLmax.
B) increase the critical angle of attack and decrease the value of CLmax.
C) decrease the critical angle of attack and increase the value of CLmax.
D) increase the critical angle of attack and increase the value of of CLmax.

15. The polar curve of an aerofoil is a graphic relation between : ( D)


A) TAS and stall speed
B) Angle of attack and CL
C) CD and angle of attack
D) CL and CD

16. For a given angle of attack induced drag is: (C)


(A) greater on a high aspect ratio wing
(B) greatest towards the wing root
(C) greater on a low aspect ratio wing
(D) balanced across the span of the wing

17. How does CL vary with altitude? (B)


(A) It increases with increased altitude
(B) It decreases with increased altitude
(C) It remains constant with increased altitude
(D) It decreases with decreased altitude

18. Lapse rate defined as (A)


A) Dt /Dh
B) Dh/ Dt
C) Dp/ Dh
D) Dρ/ Dh

19.In flight dynamic analysis plane of symmetry is________ ( B)


A)YZ
B) XZ
C) XY
D)None Of The Above

MLR Institute of Technology Page 191


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

20..Euler angles are_______ (B)


A) Pitch, Roll
B) Yaw,Roll, Pitch
C) Yaw,Pitch,Roll
D) Roll, Pitch

UNIT-V
1. The absolute ceiling of an aircraft is the altitude at which the: (A)
(A) rate of climb falls to zero
(B) rate of climb falls to 50 ft/min
(C) rate of climb falls to 100 ft/min
(D) rate of climb has a negative value

2. A reduction in air pressure results in: (B)


(A) no significant change in density
(B) a reduction in density
(C) an increase in density
(D) erratic variations in density

3. For a given angle of attack induced drag is: (C)


(A) greater on a high aspect ratio wing
(B) greatest towards the wing root
(C) greater on a low aspect ratio wing
(D) balanced across the span of the wing

4. The effect of asymmetric thrust is to: (D)


(A) decrease the ability to climb
(B) improve the turn performance
(C) decrease the fuel consumption
(D) increase the gradient of climb

5. The speed at the point where the tangent from the origin to the power-required curve for a
jet aero plane intersects is: (D)
(A) The minimum power speed
(B) The maximum range speed
(C) The minimum drag speed
(D) the long-range cruise speed

6. Which of the following variables will not affect the shape or position of the Total Drag
vs. IAS curve for speeds below the critical Mach number? (A)
(A) configuration
(B) mass
(C) aspect ratio
(D) altitude

7. As speed is reduced below Vmd, the total drag: (A)


(A) increases and speed stability decreases

MLR Institute of Technology Page 192


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

(B) decreases and speed stability increases


(C) increases and speed stability increases
(D) decreases and speed stability decreases

8. As speed is reduced from Vmd to Vmp, the power: (B)


(A) required decreases and drag increases
(B) required decreases and drag decreases
(C) required increases and drag increases
(D) required increases and drag decreases

9. The speed to attain the minimum power required for a turbojet aeroplane is: (B)
(A) less than the speed for the minimum drag
(B) higher than the speed for the minimum drag
(C) slower in a climb and faster in a descent
(D) the same as the minimum drag speed

10. With increasing altitude, the power-required curve moves: (A)


(A) up and to the right
(B) down and to the right
(C) up and to the left
(D) down and to the left

11. For a piston-engine aeroplane at a constant mass, angle of attack and configuration an
increase of altitude will require: (A)
(A) increased power but the same TAS
(B) increased power and TAS
(C) lower power but an increased TAS
(D) the same power but an increased TAS

12. At speeds below minimum drag speed, Vmd: (B)


(A) the aero plane can only be controlled in level flight
(B) a lower speed requires more thrust
(C) a higher speed requires more thrust
(D) the aeroplane cannot be controlled manually
13. In which of the following conditions is thrust available equal to drag? (B)
(A) in a descent at constant IAS
(B) in level flight at constant IAS
(C) in level flight accelerating
(D) in a climb at constant IAS

14. How does CL vary with altitude? (B)


(A) It increases with increased altitude
(B) It decreases with increased altitude
(C) It remains constant with increased altitude
(D) It decreases with decreased altitude

15. Maximum horizontal speed occurs when: (A)

MLR Institute of Technology Page 193


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

(A) thrust = minimum drag


(B) thrust does not increase with increasing speed
(C) maximum thrust = total drag
(D) thrust = maximum drag

16. The speed of Vmp for a jet aeroplane is: (C)


(A) lower than Vmd in a climb and higher than Vmd in a descent
(B) the same as Vmd
(C) always lower than Vmd
(D) always higher than Vmd

17. The tangent from the origin to the power-required curve touches the curve at the speed
of: (A)
(A) Minimum power velocity, Vmp
(B) where the L/D ratio is at a maximum
(C) where CD is minimum
(D) where the L/D ratio is minimum
18. At a constant mass, angle of attack and configuration, the power required at a higher
altitude: (A)
(A) increases and the air speed increases by the same percentage
(B) increases and the air speed remains constant
(C) decreases slightly because of the decreased density
(D) remains unchanged but the air speed increases
19. In level unaccelerated flight, if the aircraft mass is decreased: (D)
(A) Minimum drag and Vmd both decrease
(B) Minimum drag increases and Vmd decreases
(C) Minimum drag decreases and Vmd increases
(D) Minimum drag increases and Vmd increases

20. If the thrust available exceeds the thrust required in level flight the aero plane: (D)
(A) Will accelerate
(B) will descend if the airspeed remains constant
(C) Decelerates if it is in the region of reversed command
(D) will decelerate
11. 13 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS (TOTAL 5 UNITS)

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-I
1 Define
Tutorials Directed
Short Answerarc
Questions Knowledge a

MLR Institute of Technology Page 194


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2 Explain operations research techniques Understand a


3 Define Nodes and arcs Knowledge a
4 Define cycle, path Knowledge a
5 Explain arc capacity Understand a
6 Demonstrate supply node and demand node Apply b
7 Differentiate supply Node and Transshipment Node Analyze c
8 Discuss shortest path problem Understand b
9 Define maximum cost flow problem Knowledge b
10 Explain multi commodity problem Understand b

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-I Tutorials Long Answer Questions

Differentiate minimum cost flow problem and Maximum


1 Analyze a
cost flow problem based on network flow
Compare and contrast set- covering and travelling sales
2 Evaluate a
man problem
3 Crate the network diagram for multi commodity problem Create a
4 Determine the research operations for network flow models Evaluate b
5 Classify the different types of network flow models Apply a
6 Classify the different types of integer programming models Apply b
7 Generate the mathematical form for shortest path problem Create e
Determine the objective function for multi commodity
8 Evaluate c
problem
Illustrate the differences between decision variable and
9 Analyze a
parameters
Design the mathematical formulae for minimum cost flow
10 Create a
problem

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IITutorials Short Answer Questions

1 Define aircraft routing Knowledge a

MLR Institute of Technology Page 195


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2 Explain maintenance reqirements Understand a


3 Define A- Check Knowledge a
4 Define B- Check Knowledge a
5 Explain route generators Understand a
6 Demonstrate route generate and rote cycles Apply b
7 Differentiate A & B checks Analyze b
8 Discuss aircraft irregular operations Understand b
9 Define route cycles Knowledge c
Explain B757-200 five-day routing B757-200 five-day
10 Understand a
routing

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-I Tutorials Long Answer Questions

1 Differentiate A- check and b- check in maintenance Analyze b


Design a Table for B737-800 fleet schedule with major
2 Create b
modifications
3 Calculate the number of available aircraft for fleet 757-200 Apply b
Illustrate the differences between C and D checks for
4 Analyze b
aircraft
Conclude the Solution for Aircraft 757-200 based on fleet
5 Evaluate b
assignment
6 Modify the constraints for fleet 757-200 aircraft. Create b
7 Generate the mathematical model for 757-200 fleet Create b
Illustrate the differences between route generators and route
8 Analyze b
cycles
Compare and contrast the aircraft maintenance
9 Evaluate a
requirements
10 Determine the considerations for aircraft routing Evaluate a

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

MLR Institute of Technology Page 196


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

UNIT-II Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1 Explain flight scheduling Understanding a


2 Define Flight Scheduling Knowledge b
3 Define economic viability Knowledge b
4 Define Hub Knowledge b
5 Define Spoke Knowledge a
6 Explain the route system of an airline Understanding c
7 Define operational feasibility Knowledge d
8 Define Load factor Knowledge e
9 Define Frequency Knowledge a
10 Explain point to point flight Understanding d

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-II Tutorials Long Answer Questions

Illustrate difference between operational feasibility and


1 Analyze a
economic viability
2 Analyze the term economic viability? Analyze a
3 Explain the route system of an airline for flight Scheduling Evaluate a
4 Determine the flight scheduling process? Analyze b
Compare load factor and frequency based on flight
5 Evaluate b
scheduling
6 Classify the different route systems of an airline? Apply e
7 Modify point-to-point flight? Apply c
8 Differentiate hub and spoke system of flight Analyze a
9 Classify the different stages of schedule construction Apply a
Generate the flight scheduling process by solving an
10 Create c
example problem?

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

MLR Institute of Technology Page 197


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

UNIT-IVTutorials Short Answer Questions

1 Define crew scheduling process? Knowledge a


2 Discuss crew pairing? Understand a
3 Define crew generator? Knowledge a
4 Define crew rostering? Knowledge a
5 Define the different types of crew pairing? Knowledge a
6 Define the development process of crew generator? Knowledge a
7 Define manpower scheduling? Knowledge a
8 Distinguish between crew pairing and crew rostering ? Understand b
9 Explain the development process of crew pairing. ? Differentiate c
10 Derive the mathematical formulation problem of crew Understand b
pairing?

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-IV Tutorials Long Answer Questions

1 Derive the mathematical formulation problem of crew Analysis d


generator?
2 Explain the significance of manpower scheduling for Evaluate d
aircraft fleet assignment
3 Derive the mathematical formulation problem of manpower Evaluate d
scheduling. ?
4 Create the development process of crew pairing Create d
5 Discuss and Derive the mathematical formulation problem Evaluate d
of crew pairing?
Discuss and Derive the mathematical formulation problem Evaluate d
6
of crew generator?
7 Discuss and Derive the mathematical formulation problem Evaluate d
of crew rostering?
Discuss and Derive the mathematical formulation problem Evaluate d
8 of manpower scheduling?

Generate the development process of manpower scheduling Create e


9
and explain with the mathematical problem?
Differentiate crew pairing and crew rostering and describe Analyze e
10
using an example the mathematical model for crew pairing?

MLR Institute of Technology Page 198


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-V Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1 Define the gate assignment problem and Knowledge a


2 Define the distance matrix of gate assignment? Knowledge a
3 Describe some of the factors that impact the assignment of Knowledge a
gates to arriving flights?
4 Describe the different levels of aircraft boarding strategy? Knowledge b
5 Define different types of gate assignment? Knowledge a
6 Define the significance of gate assignment? Knowledge b
7 Discuss problem formulation using example? Knowledge e
8 Define aircraft boarding strategy Knowledge c
9 Explain gate assignment factors Understand a
10 Explain importance of gate Assignment Understand a

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-V utorials Long Answer Questions

1 Derive the mathematical model of model description? Evaluate a


2 Derive the mathematical model of aisle interferences? Evaluate a
3 Derive the mathematical model of aircraft boarding Evaluate a
process?
4 Derive the mathematical model of gate assignment? Evaluate b
Derive the equation in mathematical form for time bond
5 Evaluate a
approximation
6 Differentiate model description and aisle interferences Analyze b
Compare network flow models and integer programming
7 Evaluate e
models
8 Design the network diagram for shortest path problem Create c
Explain the parameters for maximum cost flow problem
9 Evaluate a
with example
10 Create the network diagram for multi commodity problem Create a

MLR Institute of Technology Page 199


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11. 14 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-I Tutorials Short Answer Questions


1. How many degrees of freedom an aircraft has? UNDERSTAND b
2. Write down the rotational and translational motion of an APPLY
airplane.. c
3. Define what is meant by equilibrium condition for an APPLY
c
airplane.
4. Define what is meant by static stability. APPLY c
5. Define dynamic stability. KNOWLEDGE a
6. Write down the drag polar equation for an airplane. KNOWLEDGE a
7. Write down the expressions for CL,CM,&CD KNOWLEDGE a
8. Write down the expressions for α, in terms of velocity KNOWLEDGE
components a
u,v&w.
9. Write down the primary controls and secondary KNOWLEDGE
a
controls of an aircraft.
10. Define pressure drag and skin friction drag of an UNDERSTAND
b
aircraft.

Blooms
Sl. Course
Questions Taxonomy
No. Outcome
Level

UNIT-I Tutorials Long Answer Questions


1. Represent the body axis coordinate system of an UNDERSTAN
airplane and list down the forces , moments and D
b
velocity components of an airplane and also show them
on the sketch.
2. Explain with relevant figure, the equilibrium conditions UNDERSTAN
D b
of an airplane in a longitudinal symmetric flight.
3. Identify the static stability conditions about the three APPLYING
c
axis of an airplane.
4. Explain their requirements for static and dynamic KNOWLEDGE
a
stability for an airplane.
5. What are the primary and secondary controls and also UNDERSTAN
D b
explain the purpose of each of these controls

MLR Institute of Technology Page 200


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

6. Explain the difference between inherently stable and EVALUATE e


marginally stable airplane
7. Determine the six degree of freedom equations of Evaluating
e
motion of an airplane
8. Elaborate the general aspects of airplane dynamics. CREATING f
9. Explain the aerodynamic controls that are used to KNOWLEDGE
a
maximize the lift
10. Explain various methods of reducing the UNDERSTAN
aerodynamics drag of an airplane D b

Blooms
Questions Taxonomy Course
Level Outcome
Sl.No.
UNIT-II TutorialsShort Answer Questions
1. Define aerodynamic derivatives. Knowledge a

2. Define the term damping. Knowledge a

3. Define the term side force. Knowledge a

4. Define the term side slip. Knowledge a

5. Write about angle of attack? Remember a

6. Explain the term down wash. understanding b

7. Define elevator control power. Knowledge a

8. Draw diagram for elevator, tab deflection. Evaluating e

9. Define the term roll damping. Knowledge a

10. Define the term yaw damping. Knowledge a

Sl.No. Questions Blooms Course

MLR Institute of Technology Page 201


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Taxonomy Outcome
Level

UNIT-II Tutorials Long Answer Questions


1. Explain significance of Aero dynamic derivatives understanding b
2. Explain importance of strip theory methods in roll stability understanding b
3. Explain the damping in roll and yaw. understanding b
4. Explain the derivatives of sideslip. Evaluating e
Discuss dimentional and dimentionless Aerodynamic
5. knowledge a
derivatives

6. Explain about rudder deflection and vehicle geometry understanding b


Explain the derivates of axial and normal force
7. Evaluating e
components

8. Explain about rudder and aileron powers understanding b


9. Explain about roll and yaw damping. Evaluating e
Write the importance of Aero dynamic forces and
10. understanding b
moment derivatives in flight dynamic performance?

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-III Tutorials Short Answer Questions


1. Define trim tab. understanding b
2. Define hinge moments. understanding b
3. Write math expression for floating tendency of elevator? Analysis c
4. Define equilibrium. understanding b
5. Define stick free stability. understanding b
6. Explain steady turn. Evaluate e
7. Explain elevator free factor. understanding b
8. Write about the word Restoring tendency? Analysis d
9. Write math expression for net hinge moments coefficient. Analysis d
10. What is hinge line? knowledge a

MLR Institute of Technology Page 202


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-III TutorialsLong Answer Questions


1. Write a detail note on maneuver point and compare it with
analysis d
neutral point
2. Explain types function and construction of tabs. Evaluate e
3. Derive equations for steady symmetric pullup and
Analysis b
coordinated turn
4. Explain pitch damping and maneuver margin understanding b
5. Write detail note on elevator hinge moments, coefficients
understanding b
and their relation to control stick forces
6. Derive equations for stick free neutral point and static
Evaluating e
margin
7. Derive expression for equilibrium of forces when elevator
Evaluating e
is left free
8. Explain the role of trim tab Analysis e
9. Explain about Hinge moments, coefficients
Restoring tendency
Floating tendency Analysis b
Elevator free factor

10. Explain the effect of freeing elevator on tail effectiveness.


Remember a

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IV TutorialsShort Answer Questions

MLR Institute of Technology Page 203


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

1. Define symmetry of aircraft. Analysis b


2. Define body axis system. understanding b
3. Draw different planes of aircraft. understanding b
4. Define angular momentum. Analysis a
5. Define moment of inertia. Remember b
6. Draw diagram for gravity forces. understanding b
7. Define the term perturbation. Analysis e
8. Define the term reference frame. Remember b
9. Draw graph for pitch stiffness. Remember a
10. Draw stability curve. Remember b

Blooms
Course
l.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IVTutorialsLong Answer Questions


1. Write detail note on systems of reference frames Analysis b
2. Discuss about Euler angles understanding b
3. discuss about earth, body, wind, stability axes understanding b
4. Write about earth to body axis transformation Analysis a
5. Explain the inertial and non inertial reference frames
Remember b

6. Write short note on


a. Inertia tensor
b. Angle of attack
understanding b
c. Angle of side slip
d. Corialis principle

7. Discuss about
e. Moment of inertia
f. Angular momentum Analysis b
g. Linear momentum
h. Inertia tensor

8. Derive expression for F X, FY,FZ .


Evaluating e
9. Derive expression for L, M ,N. Evaluating e
10. Discuss impertinence of referanceframes . Evaluating e

MLR Institute of Technology Page 204


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms
Course
l.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-VTutorialsShort Answer Questions


11. Define natural frequency. Knowledge a
12. Define the term damping. Knowledge a
13. Define the time constant. Knowledge a
14. Define the term damping force. Knowledge a
15. Explain about angle of attack? understand b
16. Explain the spring,mass,damper system. Remember b
17. Define restoring force. Knowledge a
18. Define the term spin of aircraft. Knowledge a
19. Define the term roll damping. Knowledge a
20. Define the term yaw damping. Knowledge a

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-VTutorialsLong Answer Questions


Explain significance of I,II order ordinary differential
1. Remember e
equations.

2. Explain importance spring,mass,damper system. Remember e


3. Explain the damping and inertia forces. Analysis e
4. Explain the overdamped and critically damped system. understanding b
5. Discuss under damped system. understanding f
Explain stability criteria with the help of roots of
6. Remember e
characteristic equation.

7. Explain the long period oscillations of aircraft. Remember e


8. Explain the short period oscillations of aircraft. Analysis e
9. Explain about dutch roll. Analysis e
Identify the importance of I,II order ordinary differential
10. Remember c
equations in describing aircraft modes.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 205


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IAssignmentsShort Answer Questions


1. Define the term neutral point. Knowledge a
2. Define the term Aerodynamic center. Knowledge a
3. Define the term center or pressure. Knowledge a
4. Explain tail efficiency. Evaluate e
5. Explain tail volume ratio. Evaluate e
6. Explain the notation Cmα Remember a
7. Explain the notation CmCL Understand a
8. Explain the contribution of fuselage to longitudinal static
Analysis b
stability.
9. Define the term load factor. Knowledge a
10. Define the term load factor. Knowledge a

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IAssignment.Long Answer Questions


1. Describe the following
i. Stability and control b.trim Evaluate e

2. List down aircraft components for contribution of static


longitudinal stability Remember a

3. Describe the following terms


j. Neutral point b.Static margin Understand a

4. State the functions of trim tab Evaluate e


5. Derive an expression for turn rate when aircraft
performing pull up maneuver. Evaluating e

MLR Institute of Technology Page 206


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

6. Derive an expression for radius when aircraft performing


pull down maneuver. Evaluating e

7. Derive trim equation for longitudinal static stability.


Evaluating e
8. Derive stability equation for longitudinal static stability.
Evaluating e
9. Derive an expression for wing contribution for
longitudinal static stability. Evaluating e

10. Derive an expression for tail contribution for longitudinal


Evaluating e
static stability.

Questions Blooms
Taxonomy Course
Sl.No. Level Outcome
UNIT-II AssignmentsShort Answer Questions
1. Explain the notation Cnp Understand a
2. Explain the notation Clr Analysis b
3. Explain the notation Cnδa Understand b
4. Define control derivative. Knowledge a
5. What is aspect ratio for rectangular wing? Remember a
6. What is significance of aerodynamic derivatives? Understand a
7. Draw the graph for yaw stability. Understand a
8. What is effect of density on lift coefficient? Analysis b
9. What is relation between lift coefficient and velocity? Understand b
10. Draw the graph for roll stability. Evaluate e

Questions Blooms
Taxonomy Course
Sl.No. Level Outcome
UNIT-II Assignments Long Answer Questions
1. Describe the importance of the aerodynamic derivatives. Remember a
Discuss the relation between dimensionless derivatives
2. Understand a
and dimensional derivatives.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 207


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

3. Describe the roll and yaw damping. Analysis b


4. Explain the control derivatives C ,C and C Understand b
5. Discuss the aileron power and rudder power. Evaluate e
6. Explain primary control derivatives. Remember a
7. Explain cross control derivatives. Understand a
8. Explain damping derivatives. Analysis b
9. Explain control power derivatives. Understand b
Explain Lateral and directional stability, with neat
10. Analysis b
sketches.

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Taxonomy
Questions Outcome
Level

UNIT-IIIAssignmentsShort Answer Questions


11. Define trim tab. Knowledge a
12. Define hinge moments. Knowledge a
13. Write math expression for floating tendency of elevator? Evaluate e
14. Define equilibrium. Knowledge a
15. Define stick free stability. Knowledge a
16. Explain steady turn. Analysis b
17. Explain elevator free factor. Understand b
18. Write about the word Restoring tendency? Analysis b
19. Write math expression for net hinge moments coefficient. Understand b
20. What is hinge line? Evaluate e

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IIIAssignmentsShort Answer Questions


1. Write a detail note on maneuver point and compare it with
Evaluate e
neutral point

MLR Institute of Technology Page 208


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2. Write detail note on types function and construction of tabs. Remember a


3. Derive equations for steady symmetric pullup and coordinated
Evaluating e
turn
4. Explain pitch damping and maneuver margin Understand b
5. Write detail note on elevator hinge moments, coefficients and
Evaluate e
their relation to control stick forces
6. Derive equations for stick free neutral point and static margin Evaluating e
7. Derive expression for equilibrium of forces when elevator is
Evaluating e
left free
8. Explain the role of trim tab Remember a
9. Explain about Hinge moments, coefficients
Restoring tendency
Floating tendency Understand a
Elevator free factor

10. Explain the effect of freeing elevator on tail effectiveness.


Understand b

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IVAssignmentsShort Answer Questions

1. Define the term tensor. Knowledge a

2. Define the term Aerodynamic center. Knowledge a

3. Define the term center or pressure. Knowledge a

4. Explain crioalis principle. Understand b

5. Explain sequence of Euler angles. Evaluate e

6. Explain the axis transformation. Evaluate e

7. Explain stability axis system Remember a

MLR Institute of Technology Page 209


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

8. Explain earth axis system. Understand a

9. Define the term tensor. Knowledge a

10. Explain wind axis system. Analysis b

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IVAssignmentsShort Answer Questions


1. Discuss the following
i) symmetry ii) sequence of Euler angles Understand a

2. Explain types of axis transformations. Analysis b


3. Discuss the following terms
k. earth to body axis transformation
Creating f
b. stability axis to body axis transformation

4. Demonstrate expression for linearised longitudinal and


Analysis d
lateral-directional equations of perturbed motion.
5. Demonstrate expression for linearised longitudinal
Analysis d
equations of perturbed motion
6. Demonstrate an expression for linear and angular moment
of rigid body. Analysis d

7. Explain relation between angular velocity components and


Remember a
Euler angle rates
8. Demonstrate expression for rigid body equation of
motion Analysis d

9. Demonstrate an expression for rolling moment of aircraft.


Analysis d

10. Demonstrate an expression for yawing moment of aircraft. Analysis d

Sl.No. Questions Blooms Course

MLR Institute of Technology Page 210


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Taxonomy Outcom
Level e

UNIT-VAssignmentsShort Answer Questions


1. Explain the critically damped system Understand b
2. Explain over damped system Understand b
3. Explain under damped system. Understand b
4. Define damping ratio. Knowledge a
5. What is mean b time constant Remembering a
6. What is significance I and II order ordinary differential
Remembering a
equations in aircraft control.
7. Explain the graph for yaw stability. Understand b
8. What is effect of density on lift coefficient? Remember a
9. What is relation between lift coefficient and velocity? Remember a
10. Explain the graph for roll stability. Understand b

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-VAssignmentsLong Answer Questions


1. Discuss the constant angle of attack approximations of aircraft. Creating f
2. Discuss the constant velocity approximations of aircraft Analysis b
3. Discuss phugoid mode of aircraft. Creating f
4. Explain the damping coefficient, time constant. Evaluating e
5. Discuss the damping and natural frequency. Creating f
6. Explain Dutch roll mode of aircraft. Evaluating e
7. Explain spiral divergence of aircraft. Evaluating e
8. Explain curves of dynamic stability. Evaluating e
9. Explain control power derivatives. Evaluating e
10. Explain Lateral and directional stability, with neat sketches Evaluating e

MLR Institute of Technology Page 211


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

12.0 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A52109

Course Title AEROSPACE VEHICLE STRUCTURES- II

Course Code A30103

Credit
Lectures Tutorials Practicals
Course Structure s

4 - - 3

Course Faculty veeranjaneyulu, Asst Prof

12.1 COURSE OVERVIEW:

The purpose of this subject is to provide the students with the theoretical background and
engineering applications of the theory aerospace structures. Experimental Investigation,
describes the laboratory work recommended for this course.

Aerospace vehicle structures is the subject which deals with load diffusion in
stiffened panels, Axial load flow diagrams, load diffusion in thin walled panels, Stability
of stiffened panels, shear flow in open sections, shear flow in closed section, stress
analysis of wing and fuselage, Introduction to fatigue. Analyze, the effect on the analysis
of thin walled beams under bending, Structural idealization- principal assumptions,
idealization of panel by understanding these concepts the students will be able to design
new components for an aircraft. These concepts play a crucial role in the present aerospace
industry and thorough understanding of these topics will be of help to the aircraft industry

12.2. PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

1. Mechanics of solids

4 4
UG 2 Aerospace vehicle structures-1

MLR Institute of Technology Page 212


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

4.3. COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:


e) Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)

University End Total


Session Marks (25M)
Exam Marks Marks
There shall be two midterm examinations.
Each midterm examination consists of subjective
type and objective
type tests.
The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes
duration.
Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the
student has to answer
2 questions, each carrying 5 marks.
The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20
minutes duration. It
consists of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective
type questions, the 75 100
student has to answer all the questions and each
carries half mark.
First midterm examination shall be conducted for
the first two and
half units of syllabus and second midterm
examination shall be
conducted for the remaining portion.
Assignment
Five marks are earmarked for assignments.
There shall be two assignments in every theory
course. Marks shall be
awarded considering the average of two
assignments in each course.

f) Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing

S. No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment method (s)


Ability to understand the basic aircraft
a Quiz
structural components.
Ability to analyze the thin rectangular plates
b Case studies
subject to bending and twisting
Ability to evaluate the laplace operator in
Group Activity problem
c two dimensional thin plate element subject
solving
to transverse loading
Ability to calculate the deflections due to Group Activity/ Studying
d bending parallel processing in various
processors / micro projects
Ability to develop the
e Governing equation for Shear of open Case study group wise activity
/ model design
section- shear

MLR Institute of Technology Page 213


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

centre

Ability to analyze Fuselages Bending, shear, Case study group wise activity
f
trosion / model design

12.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks


1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20
2 I Assignment lot - 5
3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20
4 II Assignment lot - 5
MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s
5 External Examination 3 hours 75
Total 100

12.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES AND COURSE OUTCOMES WITH BLOOMS


LEVEL

S.No Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms Level


Students will be able to
To impart basic concepts of thin Identify various elements of
stiffened panels and types of stiffened panels and types of
mechanical loads systems like mechanical loads systems BL 1 , BL 3
1
transverse, longitudinal and
torsional like transverse, longitudinal
. and torsional

Students will be able to


Understand the torsion of
To familiarize the basic of thin beams of closed section-
rectangular plates subject to displacements associated
2 BL 2 , BL 4
bending, twisting, distributed with Bredt-Batho shear
transverse load flow. Torsion of open
section beams.

3 To facilitate students in Students will be able to BL 3

MLR Institute of Technology Page 214


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

understanding various terms of understand the failure


Buckling of thin plates- elastic, stresses in plates and
inelastic,experimental stiffened panels
determination of critical load
for a flat plate, local instability,

Students will be able to


analyze theShear loaded thin
To facilitate students in walled beams- general
understanding various Shear stress, strain and
loaded thin walled beams- displacement relationships-
4 general stress, strain and direct stress and shear flow BL 4
displacement relationships system- shear centre, twist
and warping
.
Students will be able to
analyze the difference
To impart the concepts of shear between Buckling of thin
5 BL 5
flow, Warping
plates and Deflections due
to bending
To impart the key skill of
thin walled beams under Students will be able to
bending.Structural develop the Wing spars and
idealization-principal
6 assumptions, idealization box beams-tapered wing BL 4 BL 6
of panel spar, open and closed
section beams

12.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

General Categories of Proficiency Blooms


Outcomes Level assessed by Level
An ability to apply the
Apply
knowledge of
mathematics and
engineering to solve
A aerospace structural and H Text book
Problems
Engineering problems.
(fundamental
engineering analysis
skills).
An ability to design and Text book
B S Problems Apply
conduct engineering

MLR Institute of Technology Page 215


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

experiments, as well as
to analyze and interpret
data. (information
retrieval skills).
An ability to design and
Apply and
construct a wing Analyze
structural component, or
C process to meet desired H Assignment
needs, within realistic
constraints. (creative
skills).
Graduates will
Apply
demonstrate an ability to
visualize and work on
laboratory and Multi- Mini and Micro
D S Projects
disciplinary tasks
individually or as a
member within the
teams. (team work)
An ability to
Apply
demonstrate skills to use
the techniques, modern
engineering Tools,
Software and Micro Project
E S Models/ Gate
equipments necessary to questions
analyze structural
engineering
Problems.(Engg.
Problem solving Skills)
An understanding of
--------
F professional, social and N -------
ethical responsibility
An ability to recognize
the structural Micro Projects
G S models / Gate Analyze and
requirements. (Engg. questions Justify
Application Skills)
The broad education
Assignment Analyze
necessary to understand
H the impact of H and
Gate
engineering solutions in questions
a global, economic,

MLR Institute of Technology Page 216


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

environmental, and
societal context.
Graduate will develop
Analyze
confidence for self
education and acquire
new knowledge in the
I computing discipline S Class Test &
Seminars
and ability and practice
for Multidisciplinary
tasks as a member
within the teams
To communicate
J S Seminars Understand
effectively & Analyze
An ability to use the
Class Tests & Apply
techniques, skills and
K modern engineering S Group Activity
in
tools necessary for class room
Engineering practice.
Graduates are able to
Apply
participate and succeed
in competitive
L examination like GRE, H GATE
GATE, TOEFL, GMAT
etc.(Continuing
Education )
The use of current
Apply
application software and
the design and use of
operating systems and Text Book
M the analysis, design, S Problems as
part of
testing and Assignment
documentation of
materials for aircraft
structural technologies.
An ability to setup an
Design and
N enterprise.(Employment S Placement Develop
Skills)

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

MLR Institute of Technology Page 217


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

12.7 SYLLABUS:

UNIT – I LOAD DIFFISION IN STIFFNED PANELS: Wagner‘s theory of beams.


Shear carrying capabilities of panels and introduction to Tension field webs. Semi tension
and complete tension field beams. Minocqua and semi Minocqua structures.

SHEET STRINGER COMBINATIONS: Axial Load flow diagrams for boom in


stiffened panels. Simple illustrative examplesof A/C sheet stringer elements through free
body diagrams. Load diffusion in thin walled panels with oblique stiffeners.

UNIT - II STRESS ANALYSIS OF WING AND FUSELAGE: Procedure - Shear and


bending moment distribution for semi cantileverand other types of wings and fuselages -
Thin webbed beam with parallel and non parallel flanges, Shear resistant web beams.

UNIT - III STABILITY OF PANELS: Stability of stiffened panels. Effective width


concept. Simple estimations of load carryingcapability of stressed skins of Aircraft wing
shells.

SHEAR FLOW IN OPEN SECTIONS SUBJECTED TO PURE BENDINGS: Thin


walled beams, Shear centre and Elastic axisConcept of shear flow beams with one axis of
symmetry, Unsymmetrical box beam with effective and ineffective skins.

UNIT - IV TORSION BENDING OF OPEND TUBES: Torsion bending phenomena.


Torsion bending constant and specific torsionbending strength Simple derivation of torsion
bending equation. The phenomena of warping. Stresses in cantilever, I-beam by solution of
general differential equation for torsion beam.

UNIT - V INHIBITION OF AXIL CONSTRAINT STRESS: Torsion of thin walled


beams with open sections effect of axial constraints.Primary and Secondary warping
phenomena. Computation of torsion bending constant for open tubes with cross sections
such as Channel, T and Angle.

AIRCRAFT SKIN STIFFNERS: Methods of improving torsion bending strength by


lipping, as an effective means ofimproving torsion bending constant. Computation of
improvement of specific torsion bending strength in lipped Channel, T, I, L, sections over
the unclipped counter parts

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Megson T. H. G (2012), Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students, 5th edition,
Elsevier, USA.
2. David J. Perry (2011), Aircraft Structures, 2nd Edition, McGraw- Hill, New Delhi.

REFRENCE BOOKS:

MLR Institute of Technology Page 218


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

1. Irving Herman Shames, Clive L.Dym(2003), Energy and finite element methods
structural analysis,McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
2. B. C. Punmia (2011), Theory of Structures, 13th edition, Laxmi Publication, Hyderabad.
3. Donaldson B. K.(2008), Analysis of Aircraft Structures An introduction to Aeronautical
Structures Analysis, 2ndEdition, Cambridge University Press, USA.

12.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning

Outcomes.

Course
LNo. Learning Topics to be covered Reference Blooms Level
Outcomes
Remember /
knowledge
Introduction to Aerospace Vehicle Structures T -1
&
1 A Understanding
Understand
Wagner‘s theory of beams. T -1
2 a,b
Shear carrying capabilities of panels and Understand
T -1
3 a introduction to Tension field webs.
Understand &
Semi tension field beams T -1 Analyze
4 a, c
Understand &
complete tension field beams. T -1 Analyze
5 A,c
Understand &
Monocoque structures T -1 Analyze
6 A
Understanding
semi Minocqua structures. T -1 & Apply
7 B
Axial Load flow diagrams for boom in stiffened Understanding
T -1
8 B panels. & Apply
Simple illustrative examplesof A/C sheet stringer Understanding
T -1
9 b,c elements through free body diagrams. & Apply
Remember /
Load diffusion in thin walled panels with oblique knowledge
T -1
stiffeners. &
10 a,d Understanding
Understand &
Procedure - Shear and bending moment distribution
T -1 Analyze
for semi cantilever and other types of wings
11 a,d

MLR Institute of Technology Page 219


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Understand &
Procedure - Shear and bending moment distribution
T -1 Analyze
for semi cantilever and other types of fuselages
12 a,d
Thin webbed beam with parallel and non parallel Evaluate
T -1
13 a,d,f flanges
Understand &
Shear resistant web beams. T -1 Analyze
14 a,b,c
Evaluate
Stability of stiffened panels T -1
15 a,d,e
Evaluate
Effective width concept.. T -1
16 a,e
Simple estimations of load carrying capability of
17 stressed skins of Aircraft wing shells
Remember /
knowledge
Thin walled beams T -1
&
18 a,d Understand
Understand &
Shear centre and Elastic axis Concept of shear flow
T -1 Analyze
beams with one axis of symmetry
19 a,f
Unsymmetrical box beam with effective and Understand &
T -1
20 a,e ineffective skins Apply
Understand &
Torsion bending phenomena. T -1
21 d Apply
Torsion bending constant and specific torsion Understand&
bending strength Simple derivation of torsion T -1 Apply
22 c,d bending equation.
The phenomena of warping. Stresses in cantilever, Understanding
I-beam by solution of general differential equation T -1 & Apply
23 a,d,e for torsion beam.
Understand &
Torsion of thin walled beams with open sections T -1 Analyze
24 a,f
Understand &
effect of axial constraints. T -1 Analyze
25 b,c
Understand &
Primary and Secondary warping phenomena. T -1
26 a,d,f Analyze
Computation of torsion bending constant for open Understand &
tubes with cross sections such as Channel, T and T -1 Analyze
27 a,e Angle.
Methods of improving torsion bending strength by Understand &
lipping, as an effective means of improving torsion T -1 Apply
28 a,d bending constant

MLR Institute of Technology Page 220


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Computation of improvement of specific torsion Understand &


T -1
29 a,d bending strength in lipped Channel, L sections Apply
Computation of improvement of specific torsion Understand &
T -1
30 a,d bending strength in lipped Channel, I sections Apply
Evaluate &
Computation of improvement of specific torsion
T -1 Create
bending strength in lipped Channel, T section
31 a,d

12.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE


ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:
Course Outcomes
Course Objective
a b c d e f
I S
II H
III S H
IV S
V S H
VI H H

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

12.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF


PROGRAM OUTCOMES

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
A B C D E F G H I J k L M N
a H S S
b S H H
c S S H S S
d H S S
e S H S
f H S S S H S S

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

MLR Institute of Technology Page 221


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

12.11 SESSION PLANER

B.TECH III-I SEM

Name of the faculty: B.NAGARAJ GOUD Academic year: 2016-17

Name of the subject: Aerospace Vehicle Structures-II Branch: Aero

Teaching Session Date


Unit L. Topics to Date
S.n Session objective methodo video cond
no No be covered Plan
o logy links
After completion of this lecture, students are expected to be able to :

i. Identity the basic


aircraft structural
components.
Introduction ii. Explain the
to Aerospace different
1. L1 PPT
Vehicle terminology in
Structures aircraft wing
structure.

i. Define thin https://w


Analysis of rectangular plate ww.yout
thin ii. Differentiate ube.com
Chalk
2. L2 rectangular between the thick /watch?
&talk
plates subject plates and thin v=Ndv1
to bending rectangular plates rWr4ke4

I
Analysis of i. Define bending.
thin ii. Explain the
Chalk
3. L3 rectangular concept of thin
&talk
plates subject rectangular
to bending plate under bending

Analysis of Chalk
4.
L4 thin i. Define twisting. &talk
rectangular ii. Apply the

MLR Institute of Technology Page 222


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

plates subject moment equation for


to bending thin rectangular
&twisting plates subjected to
bending
i. Define anticlastic
Analysis of
bending
thin
ii. Apply the
rectangular Chalk
5. L5 moment equation for
plates subject &talk
thin rectangular
to bending
plates subjected to
&twisting
bending &twisting
i. Define distributed
Analysis of
transverse load.
thin
ii. Explain the
rectangular
concept of Chalk
6. L6 plates subject
distributed &talk
to distributed
transverse load on
transverse
thin rectangular
load
plate.
i. Describe the https://w
Analysis of various types on ww.yout
thin loads. ube.com
rectangular ii. Apply the /watch?
Chalk
7. L7 plates subject moment equation for v=DXO
&talk
to distributed thin rectangular FYgwF
transverse plates subjected to SYw
load distributed
transverse load
i. Discuss the
assumptions in
combined
bending.
bending and Chalk
8. L8 ii.Analyse the
in-plane &talk
combined bending
loading
and in-plane loading

i. Define the
Thin plates curvature of thin
having small plate. Chalk
9. L9
initial ii. Explain the &talk
curvature concept of Thin
plates having small

MLR Institute of Technology Page 223


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

initial curvature

i. Define the strain


Energy
energy.
methods for
ii. Explain the Chalk
10. L10 bending of
concept of Energy &talk
thin plates
methods for bending
of thin plate
i. Define the
Potential energy.
Potential
ii.Analyse the Chalk
11. L11 energy of in
Potential energy for &talk
plane loads
in plane loads

i. Define Buckling.
ii. Explain the
Buckling of Chalk
12. L12 concept of Buckling
thin plates &talk
of thin plates

i. Define critical
Experimental load.
determination ii.Determine the Chalk
13. L13
of critical load formula for critical &talk
for a flat plate load of a flat plate

i. list the different


types Tension field
Tension field
beams
beams,
ii. Explain the Chalk
14. L14 complete
concept &talk
diagonal
of Tension field
tension
beams,

Tension field i.Analyse the direct


beams, stress on beams
Chalk
15. L15 complete ii.Analyse the shear
&talk
diagonal distribution along
tension the beams
Incomplete i. Explain the
Chalk
16. L16 diagonal wanger theory.
&talk
tension. ii.Analyse the shear

MLR Institute of Technology Page 224


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

loads of Incomplete
diagonal tension
Chalk
17. L17 Class test-I
&talk
i. Define https://w
Unsymmetrical ww.yout
Unsymmetric
bending. ube.com
al bending-
ii.Analyse the Chalk /watch?
18. L18 resolution of
resolution of &talk v=tUqg_
bending
bending moments XBA0n
moments
8

i. Define direct
Direct stress
stress .
distribution Chalk
19. L19 ii.Explain the direct
due to &talk
stress distribution
bending
due to bending
i. Describe the
direct stress position of neutral
distribution,p axis Chalk
20. L20
osition of ii. Analyse the &talk
neutral axis position of neutral
axis due to bending
i. Define Deflection
Deflections ii. Evaluate the
Chalk
21. L21 due to deflection equation
&talk
II bending under transverse
load on a beam
i. Determine
theApproximations
Approximatio for thin walled
ns for thin sections. Chalk
22. L22
walled ii. Develop the &talk
sections Approximate
equation for thin
walled sections
i. Discuss about the
temperature effects..
Temperature Chalk
23. L23 ii. Determine the
effects. &talk
Temperature effects
on thin walled

MLR Institute of Technology Page 225


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

sections
Shear loaded i. Define Shear
thin Walled beams.
beams-general ii. Discuss the
Chalk
24. L24 sterss, strain general stress, strain
&talk
and and displacement
displacement relationships
relationships
i. Define shear
centre
Shear of open
ii. Discuss the shear Chalk
25. L25 section- shear
centre for different &talk
centre
types of open
section
i. Define shear force
Shear of
ii. Discuss the shear
closed Chalk
26. L26 centre for different
section- shear &talk
types of closed
centre
section
Twist i. Define Twist Chalk
27. L27
and warping. ii. Define warping &talk
i. list the different
types of closed
section beams.
Torsion of
ii. Devolop the Chalk
28. L28 beams of
bredth batho &talk
closed section
equation for
Torsion of beams of
closed section
i. Determine the
Torsion of
conditions for zero
open section
wraping.
beams.warpin
ii. Devolop the Chalk
29. L29 g of cross
bredth batho &talk
section
equation for
conditions for
Torsion of beams of
zero wraping
open section
Bending, i. Discuss the
shear, torsion bending, shear, Chalk
30. L30
of open torsion of open &talk
II section beams section beams

MLR Institute of Technology Page 226


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

ii. Analyze the


Bending, shear,
torsion of open
section beams
i. Discuss the
bending, shear,
Bending, torsion of closed
shear, torsion section beams Chalk
31. L31
closed section ii. Analyze the &talk
beams Bending, shear,
torsion of closed
section beams
Chalk
32. L32 Class test-II
&talk
Structural i. Define Structural
idealization idealization
principal ii. Discuss the
Chalk
33. L33 assumptions, principal
&talk
assumptions of
Structural
idealization
effect on the i. Discuss the effect https://w
analysis of of thin Walled ww.yout
thin Walled beams Under ube.com
beams Under bending Chalk /watch?
34. L34
bending ii. Analyze the thin &talk v=EIBe
Walled beams Under ShVFPp
bending 8

Shear of open i. Analyze the


section beams Shear of open
section beams
ii. Develop the
III
governing Chalk
35. L35
equation for Shear &talk
of open section-
shear
centre

Shear of i. Analyze the Chalk


36. L36
closed Shear of closed &talk

MLR Institute of Technology Page 227


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

section beams section beams


ii. Develop the
governing
equation for Shear
of closed section-
shear
centre

torsion i. Apply the


loading- torsion
application to loading-application Chalk
37. L37
determining to determining &talk
deflection. deflection

Exercise i. calculate the


Chalk
38. L38 problems Shear load of closed
&talk
section beams.
Closed i. Define Shear flow
section beams ii. Explain
the concept of Chalk
39. L39
Shear flow in &talk
Closed section
beams
Shear stress i. Define Shear https://w
distribution of stress ww.yout
a closed ii. Describe ube.com
section beam the Shear stress /watch?
Chalk
40. L40 built in at one distribution of a v=EIBe
&talk
end under closed section beam ShVFPp
bending,shear built in at one end 8
and torsion under bending,shear
loads and torsion loads
Shear stress i. Define Shear flow
distribution of ii. Analyze
V
a closed the Shear stress
section beam distribution of a
Chalk
41. L41 built in at one closed section
&talk
end under
bending,shear
and torsion
loads

MLR Institute of Technology Page 228


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Open section i. Define I Section


beams-I beam
Chalk
42. L42 Section beam ii. Analyze
&talk
Subjected the -I Section beam
to torsion Subjected to torsion
Torsion of i. Explain the
beam of Torsion of beam of
arbitrary arbitrary section Chalk
43. L43
section ii. Analyze &talk
the Torsion of beam
of arbitrary section
Torsion i. Discuss the
bending Torsion bending Chalk
44. L44
constant constant &talk

Distributed i. Discuss the


torque Distributed torque
loading- loading-
extension of ii. Describe Chalk
45. L45
theory for the extension of &talk
general theory for general
systems of systems of loading
loading
Shear lag- i. Define
effect of Shear lag
shearing ii. Explain the
strains in concept of Shear lag
beams-
redistributed
of bending Chalk
46. L46
stresses due to &talk
restraining of
Warping,
limitation of
elementary
bending
theory
Shear lag- i. List the limitation https://w
effect of of elementary Chalk ww.yout
47. L47
shearing bending theory &talk ube.com
strains in ii. Analyze /watch?

MLR Institute of Technology Page 229


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

beams- the effect of v=EIBe


redistributed shearing strains in ShVFPp
of bending beams-redistributed 8
stresses due to of bending stresses
restraining of due to restraining of
Warping, Warping
limitation of
elementary
bending
theory

Effect of i. Discuss the


accounting for Effect of accounting
Chalk
48. L48 shear lag on for shear lag on the
&talk
the estimated estimated strength.
strength.
Chalk
49. L49 Class test-II
&talk
Wing spars i. identify the major https://w
and box parts of Wing spars ww.yout
beams, ii. Differentiate ube.com
Chalk
50. L50 tapered wing between the /watch?
&talk
spar rectangular box v=dglh5
beams and tapered Znr6Uw
wing spar
open and i. Describe the open
closed section and closed section
beams beams
Chalk
51. L51 ii. Differentiate
&talk
between the open
and closed section
beams
open and i. Describe the open
closed section and closed section
beams beams
Chalk
52. L52 ii. Differentiate
&talk
between the open
and closed section
V beams
beams having i. Define Stringer Chalk
53. L53
variable ii. Explain &talk

MLR Institute of Technology Page 230


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Stringer areas the beams having


variable Stringer
areas.
Wings-Three- i. Describe the https://w
boom shell in Wings-Three-boom ww.yout
bending, shell in bending, ube.com
torsion torsion Chalk /watch?
54. L54
ii. Analyze the &talk v=8Wz
boom shell in mr2vhZ
bending Y4

Three-boom i. Discuss the


shell in Three-boom shell in
torsion torsion Chalk
55. L55
ii. Analyze the &talk
boom shell in
torsion
Three-boom i. Discuss the
shell in shear Three-boom shell in
Chalk
56. L56 shear
&talk
ii. Analyze the
boom shell in shear
tapered wings i. Describe the
tapered wings
ii. Differentiate Chalk
57. L57
between the &talk
tapered wings and
plan wings
Deflections, i. Describe the cut-
cut-outs in outs in wings.
Chalk
58. L58 wings. ii. Explain the
&talk
terminology of cut-
uts in wings.
Fuselages i. Define Fuselages https://w
Bending, ii. Differentiate ww.yout
shear, torsion, between the ube.com
Chalk
59. L59 Bending, and /watch?
&talk
torsion v=c26y2
-j5KrY

60. L60 cut-outs in i. Describe the cut- Chalk

MLR Institute of Technology Page 231


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

fuselages outs in fuselages &talk


with neat sketches.
ii. Explain
the conept of cut-
outs in fuselages
fuselage i. List the types of
frames and fuselage frames
wing ribs- ii. Explain the Chalk
61. L61
principles of principles of &talk
stiffener/ web stiffener/ web
construction construction
fuselage i. Describe the https://w
frames and fuselage frames ww.yout
wing ribs- ii. Differentiate ube.com
principles of between the wing Chalk /watch?
62. L62
stiffener/ web ribs and stiffener &talk v=LBF
construction m08Ww
yTg

fuselage i. Describe the


frames fuselage frames
ii. Differentiate Chalk
63. L63
between the &talk
fuselage frames and
wing frames
wing ribs. i. Define wing ribs https://w
ii. Discuss the ww.yout
arrangements of ube.com
Chalk
64. L64 wing ribs /watch?
&talk
v=8Wz
mr2vhZ
Y4
Exercise i. Calculate the
Chalk
65. L65 problems boom areas on
&talk
fuselage structures
Exercise i. Calculate the
Chalk
66. L66 problems boom areas on wing
&talk
structures.
67. L67 Class test-III

Faculty: B. Nagaraj Goud

MLR Institute of Technology Page 232


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Note: Fortnightly verification by HOD

12.12 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT-I

1.A thin plate as a sheet of material whose ____________is small compared with its other
dimensions but which is capable of resisting __________ in addition to membrane forces.
[ A ]

A. Thickness and bending


B. Width and shear stress
C. Length and bending
D. Depth and direct stress

2. Flexural rigidity denoted by_______________ [D]

A. A
B. L
C. X
D. D

3.“U” is ______________in [ A ]

A.

B.

C.

D.
4. A surface possessing two curvatures of opposite sign is known as an [C]

A. Surface Shear
B. Synclastic
C. Anticlastic
D. None
5. is __________in this equation [A]

A.

B.

C.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 233


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

D.

6. the beam buckles under the action of internal diagonal compressive stresses produced by
shear, leaving a wrinkled web capable of supporting diagonal tension only in a direction
perpendicular to that of the buckle; the beam is then said to be a. [A]

A. Complete tension field beam


B. Incomplete tension field beam
C. Anticlastic
D. None

7. The ability to support loads so that even near failure they are in state of stress
somewhere between that of pure diagonal tension and the pre-buckling [B]
stress. Such a beam is described as an

A. Complete tension field beam


B. Incomplete tension field beam
C. Anticlastic
D. None

8. A thin plate may ____ in a variety of modes depending upon its dimensions, the
loading and the method of support. [B]

A. Deflection
B. Buckling
C. Deformation
D. None

9. For P>PCR enforced lateral displacements increase and the column [A]

A. Unstable
B. Stable
C. Neutral
D. Zero

10. For P<PCR enforced lateral displacements increase and the column [B]

A. Unstable
B. Stable
C. neutral
D. zero

11. A thin plate as a sheet of material whose -------- is small compared with its other
Dimensions but which is capable of resisting bending in addition to membrane forces [A]

MLR Institute of Technology Page 234


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

A. Thickness
B. Width
C. Length
D. Depth
12. What is 𝑥𝑎 from below diagram. [D]

A. Thickness
B. Width
C. length
D. Radius of curvatures
13.Transverse loading ______________to longitudinal axis [B]

A. Parallel
B. Perpendicular
C. Inplane
D. None

14.Example for tension field beams _______ [A]


A. Spar
B. Stringer
C. Longeron
D. Bulk head
15.l/r is also known as ______ [B]

A. Radius
B. Slenderness ratio
C. MOI
D. Cenroid
16. Critical load is also called as______. [D]

A. Compressive
B. Tensile
C. Shear
D. Buckling

17. Stiffeners are used for _______ [A]


A. Stiffeneing
B. Support

MLR Institute of Technology Page 235


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

C. Join
D. None

18. In-Plane loading means_______________ [A]

A. Compressive
B. Distributed
C. Tensile
D. Shear
19. The other method for finding critical load other than Euler’s method is _[ A ]

A. Southwell
B. Wagner
C. Kappaus
D. None
20 .A thin plate as a sheet of material whose thickness is ________ compared with its other
dimensions but which is capable of resisting bending in addition to membrane forces [ A ]
Small

A. Large
B. Meadium
C. None

UNIT-II

1. The equivalent length of a beam which is fixed at both the ends of length l is [C]
A. l
B. 2l
C. l/2
D. l/√2 2
2. The value of ‘g’ (no. of cuts required to reduce the cross section to a series of flange
section ) for a cube is :- [A]
A. 4
B. 8
C. 12
D. 6
3. The buckling load for a beam which is fixed at one end and the other end free is[ D ]
A. 2 EI/l2
B. 2 EI/4l2
C. 2Π2 EI/l2
D. 4 Π2 EI/l2
4. According to Potential energy theory Nx,CR =___ [D]
A. –K ( 2 D/ b2 )
B. K/5 ( 2 D/ b2 )
C. 5K ( 2b2 /D)

MLR Institute of Technology Page 236


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

D. 2 D K/ b2
5. Choose the right option :- [C]
A. a/b = +1
B. b/a = m +1
C. a/b = m +1
D. b/a = +1

6. Effective slenderness ratio for thin walled beams : [C]


A. >80
B. <20
C. 20 < le/r > 80
D. None
7. g=2 for ________ sections [A]
A. Angle
B. Tube
C. T- Section
D. Z- section
8. Effective stiffner area ; Ase = [A]
A. As/(1+(e/r)2)
B. As/(1-(e/r)2)
C. As/(1+ /𝑟)
D. As/(1- /𝑟
9. According to simple bendind theory :- [C]
A. M= EI (d2 y/dx 2)
B. M= -EI (d2 y/dx 2)
C. M= (1/EI) (d2 y/dx 2)
D. M= (-1/EI) (d2 y/dx 2)
10. For mild steel slenderness ratio inelastic buckling occur at ______. [D]
A. 10
B. 100
C. 0.1
D. 1
11. Critical load is also called as [A]
A. Crippling load
B. Compressive
C. Tensile
D. Shear
12. Stiffeners are used for [A]
A. Stiffening
B. Compressive
C. Tensile
D. Shear
13. Effective slenderness ratio for primary instability [B]
A. >20
B. <20
C. 80

MLR Institute of Technology Page 237


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

D. 1
14. For principle moments Mt = [C]
A. 10
B. 100
C. 0
D. 1
15. The other method for finding critical load other than Euler‟s method [A]
A. South well plot
B. RankineJonson
C. Euler formula
D. None
16. Buckling factor K= [A]
A. (mb/a+a/mb)2
B. (mb/a+a/mb)
C. (mb/a+a/mb)3
D. none
17. Bredth-batho is used for ---------------- [B]
A. Open section beams
B. Closed
C. Both open and closed
D. None
18. The shear flow for closed section beam subjected to torsion [A]
A. q=T/2A
B. q=T/A
C. q=T/3A
D. None
19. Shear center is the point where --------- [C]
A. No twisting
B. Bending
C. A&b
D. None
20. Shear center for angle section lies at ------------- [C]
A. Top flange
B. Bottom flange
C. Intersection
D. None

UNIT-III

1. Sagging moment is ______ moment. [A]


A. Positive
B. Negative
C. Pure bending
D. Tensile
2. The given section is distorted due to application of load, this effect is known as [ A ]
A. Pure bending
B. Symmetrical bending
MLR Institute of Technology Page 238
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

C. Anti-clastic bending
D. unsymmetrical bending

3. Which of the following is correct for neutral axis [A]

A. (YNA/XNA) = (MyIxx - MxIxy) / (MxIyy – MyIxy)


B. (YNA/XNA) = -(MyIxx - MxIxy) / (MxIyy – MyIxy)
C. (YNA/XNA) = (MyIxx + MxIxy) / (MxIyy + MyIxy)
D. (YNA/XNA) = -(MyIxx + MxIxy) / (MxIyy + MyIxy)

4. Relation between shear force and bending moment [A]

A. Sy= 𝜕Mx / 𝜕Z
B. Sy= 𝜕My / 𝜕Z
C. Sy= -𝜕Mx / 𝜕Z
D. Sy= -𝜕 My / 𝜕Z
5. Which of the following is correct relation [B]

A. Mx = - EIxy U” – EIxy V”
B. Mx = EIxy U” + EIxy V”
C. Mx = - EIxy U” + EIxy V”
D. Mx = EIxy U” – EIxy V
6. Polar moment of inertia for a circle is [B]

A. r4 / 32
B. d4 / 32
C. r4 / 64
D. d4 / 64

7. Product of inertia is [D]

A. Always Positive
B. Always negative
C. +ve / -ve / 0
D. 0

8. Shear center is the point where [B]

A. Bending is zero
B. Twisting is Zero
C. Stress is Zero
MLR Institute of Technology Page 239
Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

D. Both A & B
9. Shear flow for closed section beam [B]

A. qs=qb+qs,0
B. -qs=qb+qs,0
C. qs=qb-qs,0
D. qs=-qb+qs,
10. Choose the correct option [B]

A. Wx =𝜕2 My / 𝜕Z2
B. Wx =𝜕2 Mx / 𝜕Z2
C. Wx =-𝜕2 Mx / 𝜕Z2
D. Wx =-𝜕2 My / 𝜕Z2
11. The middle plane of the plane does not deform during bending and is therefore a

__________ plane [A]

A. Neutral
B. Upper
C. Lower
D. Both A & B
12. For principle moments Mt = [A]

A. 0
B. 1
C. 2
D. 3
13. The total deflection W = _________________, if transverse and in-plane loads are
acting on a Plate [A]

A. W1+W0
B. W1
C. Wt+W
D. 0
14. For transverse loading potential energy V of the total load on plate is V =
_________________. [C]

A. Work potential
B. strain energy
C. U+W
D. 0
15. Spars of aircraft wing structures are known as _______________ [A]

A. Tension field beams


B. Shear beam
C. Stiffened beam
D. Both A & B
16. Boom is a ------------ [D]

MLR Institute of Technology Page 240


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

A. Concentrated area
B. Direct stress carrying element
C. Stiffened beam
D. Both A & B

17.The skin in a idealized structure carries --------------- [A]

A. Shear
B. Direct stress
C. Torsion
D. Both A& B
18. The distance between the centroids of the skin and boom is [B]

A. Large
B. Small
C. Far
D. Both A& B
19. Booms in a idealized structure carry [B]

A. Shear
B. Direct stress
C. Torsion
D. Both A& B
20. Boom area is directly proportional to [A]

A. Thickness
B. width
C. length
D. Both A & B
UNIT-IV

1.The basic funaction of an aircraft structure are to transmit and resist the [ A ]

A. Applied loads
B. Variable loads
C. Bending loads
D. None
2.Thin shells which rely entirely on their skins for their capacity to resist loads are
referred to as [B]

A. Semi monocoque
B. Monocoque
C. Circular section
D. None
3. Spars of aircraft wing structures are known as ________________ [ A ]

A. Tension field beams

MLR Institute of Technology Page 241


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

B. Shear beam
C. Stiffened beam
D. Both A & B
4. The shear force and bending moment are zero at the free end of a cantilever beam, if it
carries a [C]

A. Point load at the free end


B. Point load at the middle of its length
C. Uniformly distributed load over the whole length
D. None of the above
5. The unit of modulus of elasticity is same as those of [D ]

A. Stress, strain and pressure


B. Stress, force and modulus of rigidity
C. Strain, force and pressure
D. Stress, pressure and modulus of rigidity

6. The product of the tangential force acting on the shaft and its distance from the axis of
the shaft (i.e. radius of shaft) is known as [B]

A. Bending moment
B. Twisting moment
C. Torsional rigidity
D. Flexural rigidity

7.The ratio of the largest load in a test to the original cross-sectional area of the test piece is
called [C]

A. Elastic limit
B. Yield stress
C. Ultimate stress
D. Breaking stress

8. In a beam subjected to pure bending, the intensity of stress in any fibre is __________
the distance of the fibre from the neutral axis. [D]

A. Equal to
B. Less than
C. More than
D. Directly proportional to

9.The breaking stress is __________ the ultimate stress. [B]

A. Equal to
B. Less than

MLR Institute of Technology Page 242


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

C. Greater than
D. None

10. The shear stress at the centre of a circular shaft under torsion is [ A ]

A. Zero
B. Minimum
C. Maximum
D. Infinity

11. The fuselage shell section has been idealized such that the fuselage skin is effective
only in [A]

A. Shear
B. Bending
C. Torsions
D. None
12. Wings and fuselages are usually tapered along their lengths for greater [D]

A. Shear
B. Bending
C. Torsions
D. Greater structural efficiency
13.. Wing ribs perform functions similar to those performed by [C]

A. Stringer
B. Bulk heads
C. Frames
D. Skin
14. A thin rectangular strip suffers warping across its thickness when subjected [ A ]

A. Shear
B. Bending
C. Torsions
D. None

15. The theory of the torsion of closed section beams is known as [D]

A. Shear
B. Bending
C. Torsions
D. Bredt-Batho theory
16. A section does not remain rectangular but distorts; the effect is known as [ C ]

A. Shear
B. Bending
C. Anticlastic bending

MLR Institute of Technology Page 243


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

D. Bredt-Batho theory
17. If the shear force is 400 N over the length of the 200 mm stiffener, the shear flow is

[A]

A. 2 N/mm
B. 32 N/mm
C. 22 N/mm
D. 12 N/mm
18. A bending moment M applied in any longitudinal plane parallel to the z-axis may be
resolved into components [C]

A. Mx
B. My
C. Mx&My
D. Zero

19. For a symmetric section about both axes, the shear center lies [A]

A. Geometric center
B. Centroid
C. M.I
D. Zero

20. In many aircrafts, structural beams, such as wings, have stringers whose cross-sectional
areas vary in the---------- direction [A]

A. Span wise
B. Lateral
C. Longitudinal
D. Directional
UNIT-V

1. The basic function of an aircraft structure are to transmit and resist the [ A ]

A. Applied loads
B. Variable loads
C. Bending loads
D. None
2. Boom area is directly proportional to [A]

A. Thickness
B. Width
C. Length
D. Both a & b
3. Sectional properties are calculated for --------- carrying area only [ B ]

MLR Institute of Technology Page 244


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

A. Shear stress
B. Directstress
C. Tensile stress
D. None
4. Boom is a ------------ [D]

A. Concentratedarea
B. Direct stress carrying element
C. Stiffened beam
D. Both a & b
5. A thin rectangular strip suffers warping across its thickness when subjected [ A ]

A. Shear
B. Bending
C. Torsions
D. None
6.Shear loads produce ----------- due to bending in booms [B]

A. Shear stress
B. Directstress
C. Tensile stress
D. None
7.A section does not remain rectangular but distorts; the effect is known as [C]

A. Shear
B. Bending
C. Anticlastic bending
D. Bredt-batho theory
8. Wing ribs perform functions similar to those performed by [C]

A. Stringer
B. Bulk heads
C. Frames
D. Skin
9. Lift and drag loads induce shear flow in the skin panels and which are -------- between
adjacent booms [D]

A. Maximum
B. Minimum
C. Zero
D. Constant
10. Bending moment at any section of a wing are usually produced by______ at other
Sections of the wing. [A]

A. Shear loads
B. Direct loads
C. Shear stress
D. None

MLR Institute of Technology Page 245


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

11.All direct stresss are carried by the booms and the skin is effective in ------[ A ]

A. Shear loads
B. Direct loads
C. Shear stress
D. None
12. Shear loads produce ----------- due to bending in booms [B]

A. Shear stress
B. Directstress
C. Tensile stress
D. None

13. Sectional properties are calculated for --------- carrying area only [B]

A. Shear stress
B. Directstress
C. Tensile stress
D. None
14. in symmetrical bending x-axis becomes ----------- [A]

A. Neutral
B. Perpendicular
C. Centroid
D. None
15. The deflections in multi cellular wing may be calculated by [A]

A. Unit load
B. Moment
C. Deflection
D. None
16. For a beam having Cx or Cy axis of symmetry Ixy= [C]

A. Maximum
B. Minimum
C. Zero
D. None
17.Shear flows induce complementary shear flows in ------------ directions [ A ]

A. Longitudinal
B. Transverse
C. inclined
D. none

18. In addition to ------------ the beam is subjected to Mx and My [A]

MLR Institute of Technology Page 246


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

A. Shear loads
B. Direct loads
C. Shear stress
D. None
19. Wings and fuselages have openings in their surfaces to accommodate ----- [ D ]

A. Under carriages
B. Engines nacelle
C. Weapons
D. All

20. Neutral axis passes through ----------- of the beam section [A]

A.Centroid
B. MOI
C. CG
D.None

4. 13 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-I Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1. Define a thin plate Remember a


2. List down the applications of thin plate in aircraft Understand b
structures
3. Explain Instability of Stiffened panels Analysis c
4. Explain different boundary conditions of a thin plate Analysis a
5. Illustrate anticlastic an synclastic properties of thin plate Evaluate a
subjected to bending
6. Explain the method of calculation of ‘g’ value used in Understand d
Gerard’s method
7. Describe the parameters effecting bulking coefficient of Understand a
buckling load
8. Describe an experiment to determine the critical load of Understand b
buckling for a flat panel

MLR Institute of Technology Page 247


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

9. Explain the effect of a/b ratio of the thin plate on the Evaluate b
buckling coefficient
10. Describe the elastic bulking of thin plate Understand d

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-I Tutorials Long Answer Questions

1. Derive the equation (1/ρ) =M / [D (1+ υ)] of thin plate Create a


subjected to pure bending
2. Derive the equation M = D (1-υ) ∂2w/∂x∂y for a thin plate Create b
xy
subjected to bending and twisting.
3. A plate 10mmthick is subjected to bending moments Apply c
Mxequal to 10 Nm/mm and My equal to 5 Nm/mm. find the
maximum twisting moment per unit length in the plate and
the direction of the planes on which this occurs
4. Derive the equation M = D (1-υ) ∂2w/∂x∂y for a thin plate Create a
xy
subjected to bending and twisting
5. Illustrate anticlastic an synclastic properties of thin plate Evaluate b
subjected to bending
6. Explain the method of calculation of ‘g’ value used in Analyse e
Gerard’s method
7. Explain the parameters effecting bulking coefficient of Analyse e
buckling load
8. Describe an experiment to determine the critical load of Analyse a
buckling for a flat panel
9. Explain the effect of a/b ratio of the thin plate on the Analyse b
buckling coefficient
10. The beam shown in is assumed to have a complete tension Apply c
field web. If the cross-sectional areas of the flanges and
stiffeners are, respectively, 350mm2 and 300mm2 and the
elastic section modulus of each flange is 750mm3,
determine the maximum stress in a flange and also whether
or not the stiffeners will buckle. The thickness of the web is
2mm and the second moment of area of a stiffener about an
axis in the plane of the web is 2000mm4; E =70 000
N/mm2.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 248


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

MLR Institute of Technology Page 249


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-II Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1. Distinguish between symmetrical and unsymmetrical Evaluate d


bending of beams

2. Explain the shear flow distribution due to shear force Analysis e


3. Discuss the shear center of open section beams Understand e

4. Describe the center of twist of thin walled beams Understand d


5. Write a short note on the following Remember e
i) shear flow, ii) shear centre
6. Explain unsymmetrical bending of beams Analysis e
7. Illustrate the location of shear center of different open Evaluate d
section beams
8. Explain the condition for zero warping Understand
9. Derive the Bredt-Batho Formula for thin walled closed Create b
section beams with the help of neat sketch
10. Describe symmetrical bending of beams Understand b

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-II Tutorials Long Answer Questions

1. Derive an expression to find out the shear center of a Create c


section as figure shown in the figure
2. Explain the shear of closed section beams Analyse b
3. The cross-section of a beam has the dimensions shown in Apply d

MLR Institute of Technology Page 250


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

figure. If the beam is subjected to a negative bending


moment of 100 kNm applied in a vertical plane, determine
the distribution of direct stress through the depth of the
section

4. Determine the maximum shear stress and the warping Evaluate e


distribution in the channel section shown in Figure when it
is subjected to an anticlockwise torque of 10 Nm. G=25000

N/mm

5. Explain the primary warping of open section beam Analyse d


subjected to torsion
6. A beam having the cross section shown in Figure is Apply c
subjected to a bending moment of 1500 Nm in a vertical
plane. Calculate the maximum direct stress due to bending
stating the point at which it acts

MLR Institute of Technology Page 251


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

7. Derive (σ ) = [ (M I – M I ) / (I I – I2 )] x +[ (M I – Create c
z y xx x xy xx yy xy x yy
2
M I ) / (I I – I )] y
y xy xx yy xy

8. Derive an expression for shear flow of open section beam Create d


9. Derive expression for the shear flow of thin walled closed Create a
section beams with the help of neat sketch
10. Calculate the shear flow distribution for a closed section Apply f
beam

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-III Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1. Define a boom Remember e


2. Describe the idealization of a panel Understand e
3. List down the assumptions made in structural idealization Remember e
4. Discuss the structural idealization of aircraft structures Understand d
5. Devise an expression for the boom areas of a panel Create d
6. Describe the shear flow in a curved section beam Understand f
7. Discuss the alternate method of shear flow calculations Understand f
8. Write a short note on deflection of closed section beams Remember e
9. Discuss the torsion of open section beams Understand b
10. Explain the deflection of open section beams Analysis c

MLR Institute of Technology Page 252


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms Cour
Sl.N Taxono se
Questions
o. my Outco
Level me
UNIT-III Tutorials Long Answer Questions

1. 1) The thin-walled single cell beam shown in Figure has been Apply g
idealized into a combination of direct stress-carrying booms
and shear-stress-only-carrying walls. If the section supports
a vertical shear load of 10 kN acting in a vertial plane
through booms 3 and 6, calculate the distribution of shear
2
flow around the section. Boom areas: B =B =200 mm ,
1 8
2 2 2
B =B =250 mm B =B =400 mm , B =B =100 mm .
2 7 3 6 4 5

2. The fuselage section shown in Fig. is subjected to a bending Apply f


moment of 100 kNm applied in the vertical plane of symmetry. If
the section has been completely idealized into a combination of
direct stress carrying booms and shear stress only carrying panels,
determine the centroid of the section

3. Calculate the shear flow distribution in the channel section shown in Apply f
Fig. produced by a vertical shear load of 4.8 kN acting through its
shear centre. Assume that the walls of the section are only effective
in resisting shear stresses while the booms, each of area 300mm2,

MLR Institute of Technology Page 253


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

carry all the direct stresses.

4. The fuselage section shown in Fig. is subjected to a bending Apply f


moment of 100 kNm applied in the vertical plane of symmetry. If
the section has been completely idealized into a combination of
direct stress carrying booms and shear stress only carrying panels,
determine the direct stress in each boom

5. Create e
Derive an expression

6. Explain the shear flow in a curved section beam Analyse d

7. Explain the simplification of complex aircraft structures Analyse e

8. Explain a deflection of closed section beams Analyse e

9. Explain the shear of closed section beam Analyse g

10.Part of a wing section is in the form of the two-cell box shown in Apply d
Figure in which the vertical spars are connected to the wing skin

MLR Institute of Technology Page 254


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2
through angle sections, all having a cross-sectional area of 300 mm .
Idealize the section into an arrangement of direct stress-carrying
booms and shear-stress-only-carrying panels suitable for resisting
bending moments in a vertical plane. Position the booms at the
spar/skin junctions

MLR Institute of Technology Page 255


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms Cours
Sl.N Taxono e
Questions
o. my Outco
Level me
UNIT-IV Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1. Describe the open section beam with built up end and subjected Understan h
to torsion d

2. Derive total Torque equation of an arbitrary section beam Create g


subjected to Torsion
3. Explain shear lag that poses problems in the analysis of wide, Analysis i
shallow, thin walled beams
4. Discuss shear stress distribution of a closed section beam built-in Understan g
at one end and subjected to bending d
5. Describe the distributed torque loading Understan h
d
6. Discuss the torsion –bending constant of the Beam Understan g
d
7. Illustrate the bending of the flanges of open section beam Apply d
8. Discuss the effect of completely Understan f
restrained beam d
9. Compute the Wagner torsion bending constant for an open Apply j
section beam
10.Discuss the distributed torque loading on a beam Understan h
d

Blooms Cours
Sl.N Taxono e
Questions my Outco
o.
Level me

UNIT-IV Tutorials Long Answer Questions

1. Generate total Torque equation of an arbitrary section beam Create g


subjected to Torsion

2. A shallow box section beam whose cross-section is shown in Apply h


Fig. 26.20 is simply supported over a span of 2m and carries a
vertically downward load of 20 kN at midspan. Idealise the

MLR Institute of Technology Page 256


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

section into one suitable for shear lag analysis, comprising eight
booms, and hence determine the distribution of direct stress along
the top right-hand corner of the beam. Take G/E =0.36.

3. Develop an expression for Torsion – Bending constant for an Create g


arbitrary section beam subjected to Torsion
4. Explain shear stress distribution of a closed section beam built-in Analyse h
at one end and subjected to bending
5. Explain the torsion bending constant of the beam is firmly built- Analyse g
in at one end and carries a pure torque
6. Explain the torsion –bending constant of the Beam Analyse h
7. An open section beam of length L has the section shown in Apply h
Figure. The beam is firmly built-in at one end and carries a pure
torque T. Derive expressions for the direct stress and shear flow
distributions produced by the axial constraint (the σ and q
Г Г
systems) and the rate of twist of the beam

8. Determine the shear flow Apply i


distribution in the thin-walled Z-
section shown in Figure due to a
shear load Syapplied through the
shear center of the section

9. Determine the shear flow distribution at the built-in end of a Apply i


beam whose cross-section is shown in Fig. below. All walls have
the same thickness t and shear modulus G; R=200 mm

MLR Institute of Technology Page 257


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

10.Develop the Wagner Kapuas theorem of beams buil-in at one create g


end

MLR Institute of Technology Page 258


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-V Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1. Write a short note on analysis of aircraft components Understand i


2. Discuss the effect of taper on the aircraft spar Understand j

3. Explain the axial loads on the flanges of the tapered beam Understand i
4. Illustrate the shear flow in the web of the tapered beam Apply j
5. Describe the modification of moment due to boom load Understand j
6. Discuss the torsion –bending constant of the Beam Understand i
7. Remember j
Write short note on fuselage subjected to bending

8. Describe the fuselage subjected to Understand h


torsion

9. Explain the wing structure subjected to bending Understand i

10. Write short note on the analysis of fuselage frames Remember i

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-V Tutorials Long Answer Questions

1. Create i
Develop an expression for shear flow of a tapered beam
2. A wing spar has the dimensions shown in Fig and carries a uniformly Apply j
distributed load of 15 kN/m along its complete length. Each flange has a
cross-sectional area of 500mm2 with the top flange being horizontal. If
the flanges are assumed to resist all direct loads while the spar web is
effective only in shear, determine the flange loads and the shear flows in

MLR Institute of Technology Page 259


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

the web at sections 1 and 2m from the free end

3. The wing section shown in Figure has been idealized such that the Apply j
booms carry all the direct stresses. If the wing section is subjected to a
bending moment of 300 kN m applied in a vertical plane, calculate the
2
direct stresses in the booms. Boom areas: B = B = 2580 mm B = B =
1 6 2 5
2 2
3880 mm B = B = 3230 mm
3 4

4. Determine the shear flow distribution in the web of the tapered beam Apply h
shown in Figure at a section midway along its length. The web of the
beam has a thickness of 2 mm and is fully effective in resisting direct
stress. The beam tapers symmetrically about its horizontal centroidal
2
axis and the cross-sectional area of each flange is 400 mm

5. The cantilever beam shown in Figure is uniformly tapered along its Apply h
length in both x and y directions and carries a load of 100 kN at its free
end. Calculate the forces in the booms and the shear flow distribution in
the walls at a section 2 m from the built-in end if the booms resist all the
direct stresses while the walls are effective only in shear. Each corner
2
boom has a cross-sectional area of 900 mm while both central booms
2
have cross-sectional areas of 1200 mm

MLR Institute of Technology Page 260


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

6. The wing section shown in Figure has been idealized such that the Apply g
booms carry all the direct stresses. If the wing section is subjected to a
bending moment of 300 kN m applied in a vertical plane, calculate the
2
direct stresses in the booms. Boom areas: B = B = 2580 mm B = B =
1 6 2 5
2 2
3880 mm B = B = 3230 mm
3 4

7. Calculate the shear flows in the web panels and the axial loads in the Apply i
flanges of the wing rib shown in Figure. Assume that the web of the rib
is effective only in shear while the resistance of the wing to bending
moments is provided entirely by the three flanges 1, 2 and 3.

8. Calculate the deflection at the free end of the two cell beam shown in Apply j
figure below. Allowing for both bending and shear effects. The boom
carries all constant thickness throughout, are effective only in shear.
Take E =69000 N/mm² and G =25900 N/mm². Boom areas: B1 =B3
=B4 =B5 =B6 =650mm²; B2 =B5 =1300mm².

MLR Institute of Technology Page 261


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

9. Apply j
The fuselage shown in Fig. a) below is subjected to a vertical shear load
of 100 kN applied at a distance of 150mm from the vertical axis of
symmetry as shown, for the idealized section, in Fig. b). Calculate the
distribution of shear flow in the section

10. Apply h
Calculate the shear flows in the web panels and direct load in the
flanges and stiffeners of the beam shown in Figure if the web panels
resist shear stresses only

MLR Institute of Technology Page 262


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

12. 14 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-I
Assignment Short Answer Questions
1 Discuss the applications of thin plate in aircraft structures Understand a
Describe the parameters effecting bulking coefficient of buckling Understand c
2
load
Explain the effect of a/b ratio of the thin plate on the buckling Understand d
3
coefficient
4 Describe the elastic bulking of thin plate Understand e
Explain the method of calculation of ‘g’ value used in Gerard’s Analysis c
5
method
Explain an experiment to determine the critical load of buckling Understand b
6
for a flat panel
7 Explain the complete tension field beam Understand c
Explain unsymmetrical bending of Analysis
8
beams
9 Define loading ratio Remember a
Describe the post bulking behavior of the beam Understand b
10

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT- Assignment Answer Questions

A thin rectangular plate a×bis simply supported along its edges Apply b
and carries a uniformly distributed load of intensity q0. Determine
1
the deflected form of the plate and the distribution of bending
moment

MLR Institute of Technology Page 263


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

A rectangular plate a×b, is simply supported along each edge and Apply c
carries a uniformly distributed load of intensity q0. Assuming a
2 deflected shape given by . Determine the value
of the coefficient A11 and hence find the maximum value of
deflection
Part of a compression panel of internal construction is shown in Apply b
Figure. The equivalent pin-centre length of the panel is 500 mm.
The material has a Young’s modulus of 70 000 N/mm2 and its
elasticity may be taken as falling catastrophically when a
compressive stress of 300 N/mm2 is reached. Taking coefficients
of 3.62 for buckling of a plate with simply supported sides and of
0.385 with one side simply supported and one free, determine (a)
the load per mm width of panel when initial buckling may be

3 expected and (b) the load per mm for ultimate failure. Treat the
material as thin for calculating section constants and assume that
after initial buckling the stress in the plate increases parabolically
from its critical value in the centre of sections

Explain post buckling behavior of complete and incomplete Analyse b


4
diagonal tension field beams.
A plate 10mmthick is subjected to bending moments Mxequal to Apply b
10 Nm/mm and My equal to 5 Nm/mm. find the maximum twisting
5
moment per unit length in the plate and the direction of the planes
on which this occurs
Determine the deflected form of the thin rectangular plate of Apply c
Example 7.1 if, in addition to a uniformly distributed transverse
6
load of intensity q0, it supports an in-plane tensile force Nxper unit
length.
7 Explain the post bulking behavior of the diagonal tension field Analyse c

MLR Institute of Technology Page 264


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

beam
Explain the effect of angle of buckle on the compressive load on b
8
the stiffener.
2
Derive the equation M = D (1-υ) ∂ w/∂x∂y for a thin plate Create a
xy
9
subjected to bending and twisting
10 Explain the energy methods used in the analysis of thin plates Analyse c

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IIAssignment Short Answer Questions

1. Classify the thin walled beams with the help of neat sketches Evaluate d
2. Explain the warping of the cross – section. Understand c
3. Derive the equations to find out the primary of an open cross Create b
section subjected to Torsion
4. Derive the equations to find out secondary warping of an open Create d
cross section subjected to Torsion
5. Explain the shear center Understand c
6. Write a short note on the center of twist Understand d
7. Describe anti clastic bending Understand c
8. Explain unsymmetrical bending of Understand d
beams
9. Explain the warping distribution by varying the shear flow Understand c
10. Explain the symmetrical bending of beams Analyse d

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-II Assignment Answer Questions

1 Explain the shear center of open section beams Analyse c


2
2 Derive (σ ) = [ (M I – M I ) / (I I – I )] x +[ (M I – Create c
z y xx x xy xx yy xy x yy

MLR Institute of Technology Page 265


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

2
M I ) / (I I – I )] y
y xy xx yy xy

3 Illustrate the direct stress distribution of I section Evaluate d


Derive the equations to find out secondary warping of an Evaluate e
4
open cross section subjected to Torsion
Explain the shear of closed section beam subjected to Analyse c
5
torque
6 Calculate the warping distribution of channel section Apply d
Develop an expression for the shear flow of an open section Create c
7
beam
2
Derive (σ ) = [ (S I – M I ) / (I I – I )] x +[ (S I – Apply d
z y xx x xy xx yy xy x yy
2
8 M I ) / (I I – I )] y
y xy xx yy xy

A thin-walled circular section beam has a diameter of 200 Apply c


mm and is 2 m long; it is firmly restrained against rotation
at each end. A concentrated torque of 30 kN m is applied to
the beam at its mid span point. If the maximum shear stress
9 2
in the beam is limited to 200 N/mm and the maximum
0
angle of twist to 2 , calculate the minimum thickness of the
2
beam walls. Take G=25000N/mm .
10 Determine the warping distribution of rectangular beam Apply b

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-III Assignment Short Answer Questions

1. Discuss the shear of closed section beams Understand d


Explain effect of idealization on the analysis of closed section Understand d
2.
beams
3. Write a short note on idealized wing section Anlysis e

MLR Institute of Technology Page 266


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

4. Discuss the idealization of fuselage section Understand e


Write a short note on the boom and the skin of the idealized Understand c
5.
section
6. Discuss the shear of closed section beam Understand c
Explain effect of idealization on the analysis of closed section Understand d
7.
beams
Explain the effect of thickness on Understand b
8.
boom areas
9. Discuss the effect of idealization on the open section beam Understand d
10. Explain the boom area of a panel Understand e

Blooms Cour
Sl.N Taxono se
Questions
o. my Outco
Level me
UNIT-III Assignment Answer Questions

Apply h
The fuselage section shown in Fig. is subjected to a bending
moment of 100 kNm applied in the vertical plane of symmetry. If
the section has been completely idealized into a combination of
direct stress carrying booms and shear stress only carrying panels,
determine the centroid of the section
1

Calculate the shear flow distribution in the channel section shown in Apply g
Fig. produced by a vertical shear load of 4.8 kN acting through its
2 shear centre. Assume that the walls of the section are only effective
in resisting shear stresses while the booms, each of area 300mm2,
carry all the direct stresses

MLR Institute of Technology Page 267


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

The fuselage section shown in Fig. is subjected to a bending Apply f


moment of 100 kNm applied in the vertical plane of symmetry. If
the section has been completely idealized into a combination of
direct stress carrying booms and shear stress only carrying panels,
determine the direct stress in each boom
3

Create f
Derive an expression

Describe the shear flow in a curved section beam Understa g


5
nd
6 Discuss the torsion of open section beams Analyse g
7 Explain a short note on deflection of closed section beams Analyse h
8 Explain the shear flow in a curved section beam Analyse g
Apply g
Calculate the shear flow distribution in the channel section shown in
9 Fig. 20.7 produced by a vertical shear load of 4.8 kN acting through
its shear centre. Assume that the walls of the section are only
effective in resisting shear stresses while the booms, each of area
300mm2, carry all the direct

MLR Institute of Technology Page 268


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

stresses

Devise an expression for the boom areas of a panel Create d


10

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-IVAssignment Short Answer Questions

Understand h
1. Discuss the effect of completely restrained beam

Evaluate i
State the assumptions made in stress distribution at built-in end of the
2.
beam

3. Explain the shear lag effect in a idealized beam Understand j


Discuss the warping distribution in a react angular beam subjected to Understand f
4.
torsion
5. Discuss the total torque of the beam built-in at end Understand j
Develop an expression for shear stress distribution of closed section beam Create i
6.
built-in at one end
. Understand h
7.
Explain the torsion bending constant
write a short note on torsion of an Understand f
8.
arbitrary cross section
Understand h
9.
Describe the moment couple
Understand i
10.
Discuss the effect of completely restrained beam

Sl.No. Questions Blooms Course

MLR Institute of Technology Page 269


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Taxonomy Outcome
Level
UNIT-I Assignment Answer Questions

Apply h
Determine the torsion bending constant for the thin-walled beam
shown in
Fig. and also derive an expression for the angle of twist at its free
end

A thin-walled, I-section beam, of constant wall thickness t, is Apply g


mounted as a
cantilever with its web horizontal. At the tip, a downward force is
applied in the plane of one of the flanges, as shown in Fig Assuming
the necessary results of the elementary theory of bending, the St.
Venant theory of torsion and the Wagner torsion bending theory,
determine the distribution of direct stress over the cross-section at the
2
supported end.

Determine the shear flow distribution at the built-in end of a beam Apply g
3 whose cross-section is shown in Fig.All walls have the same
thickness t and shear modulus G;R =200 mm

MLR Institute of Technology Page 270


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

4 Illustrate I-section beam subjected to torsion Evaluate h


Explain shear lag that poses problems in the analysis of wide, Analyse j
5
shallow, thin walled beams
6 Compute the moment couple of an open section beam Apply g
7 Illustrate the torsion of an arbitrary open section beam Evaluate h
Generate total Torque equation of an arbitrary section beam Create g
8
subjected to Torsion
Analyse i
9
Explain the Wagner Kapuas theorem of beams buil-in at one end
Illustrate an open section beam restrained at one end subjected to Evaluate f
10
torsion

Blooms
Course
Sl.No. Questions Taxonomy
Outcome
Level

UNIT-V Assignment Short Answer Questions

1. Illustrate the cut-outs in the fuselage structure Understand i


2. Discuss the functions of wing rib Understand j
3. Illustrate the cut-outs in the fuselage structure Understand h
4. Explain the axial loads on the flanges of the tapered beam Understand i
5. Describe the modification of moment due to boom load Understand j
6. Write a short note on a beams with variable stringer areas Remember i
7. .Discuss the fuselage subjected to shear Understand i
Explain the wing structure Understand h
8.
subjected to bending
9. Discuss the construction details of the wing structure Understand h
10. Discuss the analysis of wing structure Understand g

MLR Institute of Technology Page 271


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

Blooms Course
Taxonomy Outcome
Sl.No. Questions
Level

UNIT-V Assignment Answer Questions

The fuselage of a light passenger aircraft carrying aircraft has the Apply i
circular cross section as shown in the fig The cross sectional area of
each stringer is 100 mm2. Calculate the direct stress distribution
Illustrate the cut-outs in the fuselage structure
1

Analyse j
2
Explain the cut-outs in the fuselage structure
3 Illustrate the cut-outs in the fuselage structure Evaluate h
4 Derive an expression for the axial loads of a tapered wing spar Create j
5 Explain the modification of moment due to boom load Analyse g
Develop an expression for the shear force in the web of a tapered Create i
6
beam
A doubly symmetrical fuselage is shown in the fig.It has been Apply j
idealized into direct stress carrying booms and shear stress carrying
skin panels.the boom areas are 150 mm2.determine the direct stress
in the booms and shear stress in the panels when the beam is
subjected to a shear load of 50 kN and a bending moment of 100kN-
m
7

8 Develop the multicell wing subjected to torsion Create i


9 Explain the cut-out for windows in the aircraft structures Analyse j
Develop an expression for the shear force in the web of a tapered Create h
10
beam

MLR Institute of Technology Page 272


Dept. of AERO Student Hand Book

(A) PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

Program outcomes are narrower statements that describe what students are expected to
know and be able to do by the time of graduation. These relate to the skills, knowledge, and
behaviors that students acquire in engineering education.

A. Ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, computing, science, and


engineering to solve Aeronautical engineering problems.
B. Ability to design and conduct engineering experiments, as well as to analysis and
design of models.
C. Ability to design, Analysis and manufacture systems, component, or process to meet
desired needs, within realistic constraints.
D. An ability to function on multi – disciplinary teams.
E. An ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering problems.
F. An understanding of professional, social and ethical responsibility.
G. An ability to communicate effectively.
H. The broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in
a global, economic, environmental, and societal context.
I. An ability to recognize the need for and an ability to engage in life – long learning.
J. An ability to gain knowledge of contemporary issues.
K. An ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for
engineering practice.
L. Graduates are able to participate and succeed in competitive examination like GRE,
GATE, TOEFL, GMAT etc.

(B) PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)


M. Apply engineering and management knowledge and techniques to estimate time and
resources needed to complete aerospace/Mechanical engineering projects.
N. Able to recognize the challenging and rewarding careers in aerospace.

MLR Institute of Technology Page 273

You might also like